Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in info
      1 This is
      2 /disk2/dougkwan/android-4/toolchain/android-toolchain/binutils-2.17/ld/ld.info,
      3 produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
      4 /disk2/dougkwan/android-4/toolchain/android-toolchain/binutils-2.17/ld/ld.texinfo.
      5 
      6 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      7 * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
      8 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      9 
     10    This file documents the GNU linker LD version 2.17.
     11 
     12    Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
     13 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     14 
     15 
     16 File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
     17 
     18 Using ld
     19 ********
     20 
     21 This file documents the GNU linker ld version 2.17.
     22 
     23    This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
     24 Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
     25 section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
     26 
     27 * Menu:
     28 
     29 * Overview::                    Overview
     30 * Invocation::                  Invocation
     31 * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
     32 
     33 * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
     34 
     35 * BFD::                         BFD
     36 
     37 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
     38 * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
     39 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
     40 * Index::                       Index
     41 
     42 
     43 File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
     44 
     45 1 Overview
     46 **********
     47 
     48 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
     49 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
     50 a program is to run `ld'.
     51 
     52    `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
     53 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
     54 total control over the linking process.
     55 
     56    This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
     57 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
     58 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
     59 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
     60 of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
     61 
     62    Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
     63 linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
     64 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
     65 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
     66 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
     67 
     68 
     69 File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
     70 
     71 2 Invocation
     72 ************
     73 
     74 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
     75 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
     76 have many choices to control its behavior.
     77 
     78 * Menu:
     79 
     80 * Options::                     Command Line Options
     81 * Environment::                 Environment Variables
     82 
     83 
     84 File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
     85 
     86 2.1 Command Line Options
     87 ========================
     88 
     89    The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
     90 practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
     91 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
     92 standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
     93 `hello.o':
     94 
     95      ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
     96 
     97    This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
     98 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
     99 which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
    100 discussion of the `-l' option below.)
    101 
    102    Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
    103 point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
    104 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
    105 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
    106 other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
    107 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
    108 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
    109 option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
    110 noted in the descriptions below.
    111 
    112    Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
    113 linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
    114 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
    115 placed between an option and its argument.
    116 
    117    Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
    118 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
    119 script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
    120 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
    121 message `No input files'.
    122 
    123    If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
    124 assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
    125 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
    126 linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
    127 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
    128 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
    129 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Note that specifying a
    130 script in this way merely augments the main linker script; use the `-T'
    131 option to replace the default linker script entirely.  *Note Scripts::.
    132 
    133    For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
    134 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
    135 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
    136 requires them.
    137 
    138    For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
    139 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
    140 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
    141 rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
    142 only be preceeded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
    143 `-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
    144 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
    145 
    146    Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
    147 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
    148 immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
    149 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
    150 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
    151 
    152    Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
    153 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
    154 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
    155 compiler driver) like this:
    156 
    157        gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
    158 
    159    This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
    160 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
    161 
    162    Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
    163 GNU linker:
    164 
    165 `@FILE'
    166      Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
    167      inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
    168      exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
    169      literally, and not removed.
    170 
    171      Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
    172      character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
    173      option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
    174      (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
    175      to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
    176      additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
    177      recursively.
    178 
    179 `-aKEYWORD'
    180      This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
    181      argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
    182      `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
    183      and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
    184      `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
    185 
    186 `-AARCHITECTURE'
    187 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
    188      In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
    189      Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
    190      ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
    191      the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
    192      archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
    193      i960, for details.
    194 
    195      Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
    196      other architecture families.
    197 
    198 `-b INPUT-FORMAT'
    199 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
    200      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    201      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
    202      option to specify the binary format for input object files that
    203      follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
    204      configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
    205      usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
    206      expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
    207      machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
    208      format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
    209      available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
    210 
    211      You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
    212      unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
    213      explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
    214      including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
    215      particular format.
    216 
    217      The default format is taken from the environment variable
    218      `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
    219      format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
    220      Commands::.
    221 
    222 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    223 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    224      For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
    225      files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
    226      described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
    227      MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
    228      linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
    229      language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
    230      directories specified by any `-L' options.
    231 
    232 `-d'
    233 `-dc'
    234 `-dp'
    235      These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
    236      for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
    237      symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
    238      `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
    239      effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    240 
    241 `-e ENTRY'
    242 `--entry=ENTRY'
    243      Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
    244      program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
    245      symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
    246      and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
    247      in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
    248      `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
    249      and other ways of specifying the entry point.
    250 
    251 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
    252      Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
    253      not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
    254      by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
    255      symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
    256      option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
    257      linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
    258      explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
    259      this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
    260      option will be treated as hidden.
    261 
    262 `-E'
    263 `--export-dynamic'
    264      When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to
    265      the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of
    266      symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
    267 
    268      If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will
    269      normally contain only those symbols which are referenced by some
    270      dynamic object mentioned in the link.
    271 
    272      If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
    273      back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
    274      dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
    275      linking the program itself.
    276 
    277      You can also use the version script to control what symbols should
    278      be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
    279      it.  See the description of `--version-script' in *Note VERSION::.
    280 
    281 `-EB'
    282      Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
    283 
    284 `-EL'
    285      Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
    286      format.
    287 
    288 `-f'
    289 `--auxiliary NAME'
    290      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
    291      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    292      the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
    293      auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
    294 
    295      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    296      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
    297      field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
    298      object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
    299      shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
    300      the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
    301      not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
    302      alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
    303      debugging or for machine specific performance.
    304 
    305      This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
    306      entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
    307      command line.
    308 
    309 `-F NAME'
    310 `--filter NAME'
    311      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
    312      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    313      the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
    314      should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
    315      object NAME.
    316 
    317      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    318      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
    319      field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
    320      symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
    321      link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
    322      filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
    323      provided by the object NAME.
    324 
    325      Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
    326      toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
    327      output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
    328      this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
    329      `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
    330      environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
    331      when not creating an ELF shared object.
    332 
    333 `-fini NAME'
    334      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    335      the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
    336      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
    337      as the function to call.
    338 
    339 `-g'
    340      Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
    341 
    342 `-GVALUE'
    343 `--gpsize=VALUE'
    344      Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
    345      register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
    346      such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
    347      into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
    348      formats.
    349 
    350 `-hNAME'
    351 `-soname=NAME'
    352      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
    353      field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
    354      shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
    355      executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
    356      shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
    357      using the file name given to the linker.
    358 
    359 `-i'
    360      Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
    361 
    362 `-init NAME'
    363      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    364      the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
    365      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
    366      as the function to call.
    367 
    368 `-lARCHIVE'
    369 `--library=ARCHIVE'
    370      Add archive file ARCHIVE to the list of files to link.  This
    371      option may be used any number of times.  `ld' will search its
    372      path-list for occurrences of `libARCHIVE.a' for every ARCHIVE
    373      specified.
    374 
    375      On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
    376      libraries with extensions other than `.a'.  Specifically, on ELF
    377      and SunOS systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library with
    378      an extension of `.so' before searching for one with an extension of
    379      `.a'.  By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.
    380 
    381      The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
    382      it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
    383      symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
    384      the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
    385      appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
    386      symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
    387      cause the linker to search the archive again.
    388 
    389      See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
    390      archives multiple times.
    391 
    392      You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
    393 
    394      This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
    395      However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
    396      from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
    397 
    398 `-LSEARCHDIR'
    399 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
    400      Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
    401      archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
    402      option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
    403      order in which they are specified on the command line.
    404      Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
    405      default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
    406      regardless of the order in which the options appear.
    407 
    408      If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
    409      "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
    410 
    411      The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
    412      `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
    413      cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
    414 
    415      The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
    416      `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
    417      at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
    418      line.
    419 
    420 `-mEMULATION'
    421      Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
    422      emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
    423 
    424      If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
    425      `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
    426 
    427      Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
    428      configured.
    429 
    430 `-M'
    431 `--print-map'
    432      Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
    433      information about the link, including the following:
    434 
    435         * Where object files are mapped into memory.
    436 
    437         * How common symbols are allocated.
    438 
    439         * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
    440           the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
    441 
    442         * The values assigned to symbols.
    443 
    444           Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
    445           which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
    446           symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
    447           This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
    448           only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
    449           circumstances the linker will display the final value
    450           enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
    451           script containing:
    452 
    453                   foo = 1
    454                   foo = foo * 4
    455                   foo = foo + 8
    456 
    457           will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
    458           option is used:
    459 
    460                   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
    461                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
    462                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
    463 
    464           See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
    465           expressions in linker scripts.
    466 
    467 `-n'
    468 `--nmagic'
    469      Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
    470      `NMAGIC' if possible.
    471 
    472 `-N'
    473 `--omagic'
    474      Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
    475      do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
    476      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    477      numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
    478      text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
    479      to the format specification published by Microsoft.
    480 
    481 `--no-omagic'
    482      This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
    483      sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
    484      to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
    485      against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
    486 
    487 `-o OUTPUT'
    488 `--output=OUTPUT'
    489      Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
    490      option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
    491      script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
    492 
    493 `-O LEVEL'
    494      If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
    495      output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
    496      probably should only be enabled for the final binary.
    497 
    498 `-q'
    499 `--emit-relocs'
    500      Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked
    501      exececutables.  Post link analysis and optimization tools may need
    502      this information in order to perform correct modifications of
    503      executables.  This results in larger executables.
    504 
    505      This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
    506 
    507 `--force-dynamic'
    508      Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
    509      specific to VxWorks targets.
    510 
    511 `-r'
    512 `--relocatable'
    513      Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
    514      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
    515      linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
    516      Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
    517      number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
    518      file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
    519      not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
    520 
    521      When an input file does not have the same format as the output
    522      file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
    523      not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
    524      further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
    525      not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
    526      all.
    527 
    528      This option does the same thing as `-i'.
    529 
    530 `-R FILENAME'
    531 `--just-symbols=FILENAME'
    532      Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
    533      relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
    534      file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
    535      in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
    536 
    537      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
    538      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
    539      treated as the `-rpath' option.
    540 
    541 `-s'
    542 `--strip-all'
    543      Omit all symbol information from the output file.
    544 
    545 `-S'
    546 `--strip-debug'
    547      Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
    548      output file.
    549 
    550 `-t'
    551 `--trace'
    552      Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
    553 
    554 `-T SCRIPTFILE'
    555 `--script=SCRIPTFILE'
    556      Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
    557      default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
    558      must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
    559      *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
    560      directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
    561      preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
    562 
    563 `-u SYMBOL'
    564 `--undefined=SYMBOL'
    565      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
    566      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
    567      modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
    568      different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
    569      This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
    570 
    571 `-Ur'
    572      For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
    573      `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
    574      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
    575      `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
    576      does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
    577      with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
    578      be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
    579      for the others.
    580 
    581 `--unique[=SECTION]'
    582      Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
    583      SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
    584      for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
    585      specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
    586      multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
    587      merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
    588      section assignments in a linker script.
    589 
    590 `-v'
    591 `--version'
    592 `-V'
    593      Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
    594      the supported emulations.
    595 
    596 `-x'
    597 `--discard-all'
    598      Delete all local symbols.
    599 
    600 `-X'
    601 `--discard-locals'
    602      Delete all temporary local symbols.  For most targets, this is all
    603      local symbols whose names begin with `L'.
    604 
    605 `-y SYMBOL'
    606 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
    607      Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
    608      option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
    609      necessary to prepend an underscore.
    610 
    611      This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
    612      link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
    613 
    614 `-Y PATH'
    615      Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
    616      for Solaris compatibility.
    617 
    618 `-z KEYWORD'
    619      The recognized keywords are:
    620     `combreloc'
    621           Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
    622           dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
    623 
    624     `defs'
    625           Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
    626           symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
    627 
    628     `execstack'
    629           Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
    630 
    631     `initfirst'
    632           This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
    633           It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
    634           occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
    635           brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
    636           runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
    637           runtime finalization of any other objects.
    638 
    639     `interpose'
    640           Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
    641           symbols but the primary executable.
    642 
    643     `loadfltr'
    644           Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
    645           runtime.
    646 
    647     `muldefs'
    648           Allows multiple definitions.
    649 
    650     `nocombreloc'
    651           Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
    652 
    653     `nocopyreloc'
    654           Disables production of copy relocs.
    655 
    656     `nodefaultlib'
    657           Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
    658           object will ignore any default library search paths.
    659 
    660     `nodelete'
    661           Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
    662 
    663     `nodlopen'
    664           Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
    665 
    666     `nodump'
    667           Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
    668 
    669     `noexecstack'
    670           Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
    671 
    672     `norelro'
    673           Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
    674           object.
    675 
    676     `now'
    677           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    678           tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
    679           program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
    680           using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
    681           to the point when the function is first called.
    682 
    683     `origin'
    684           Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
    685 
    686     `relro'
    687           Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
    688 
    689 
    690      Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
    691 
    692 `-( ARCHIVES -)'
    693 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
    694      The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
    695      either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
    696 
    697      The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
    698      undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
    699      searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
    700      command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
    701      undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
    702      appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
    703      resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
    704      searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
    705 
    706      Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
    707      to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
    708      between two or more archives.
    709 
    710 `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    711 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
    712      Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
    713      recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
    714      doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
    715      This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
    716      2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
    717      reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    718      option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
    719 
    720 `--as-needed'
    721 `--no-as-needed'
    722      This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
    723      mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
    724      Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
    725      library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
    726      library is actually needed.  `--as-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags
    727      to only be emitted for libraries that satisfy some symbol
    728      reference from regular objects which is undefined at the point
    729      that the library was linked.  `--no-as-needed' restores the
    730      default behaviour.
    731 
    732 `--add-needed'
    733 `--no-add-needed'
    734      This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
    735      DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
    736      after the `--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
    737      a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
    738      `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
    739      those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
    740      default behaviour.
    741 
    742 `-assert KEYWORD'
    743      This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
    744 
    745 `-Bdynamic'
    746 `-dy'
    747 `-call_shared'
    748      Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    749      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
    750      is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
    751      of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
    752      may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
    753      library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
    754 
    755 `-Bgroup'
    756      Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
    757      section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
    758      object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
    759      `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
    760      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    761 
    762 `-Bstatic'
    763 `-dn'
    764 `-non_shared'
    765 `-static'
    766      Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    767      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
    768      variants of this option are for compatibility with various
    769      systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
    770      line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
    771      it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
    772      This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
    773      shared library is being created but that all of the library's
    774      external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
    775      static libraries.
    776 
    777 `-Bsymbolic'
    778      When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
    779      to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
    780      is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
    781      override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
    782      only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    783 
    784 `--check-sections'
    785 `--no-check-sections'
    786      Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
    787      been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
    788      linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
    789      will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
    790      and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
    791      behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
    792      `--check-sections'.
    793 
    794 `--cref'
    795      Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
    796      generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
    797      Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
    798 
    799      The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
    800      easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
    801      printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
    802      names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
    803      is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
    804      references to the symbol.
    805 
    806 `--no-define-common'
    807      This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
    808      The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
    809      *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    810 
    811      The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
    812      assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
    813      file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
    814      assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
    815      allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
    816      be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
    817      the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
    818      prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
    819      duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
    820      search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
    821 
    822 `--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
    823      Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
    824      address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
    825      times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
    826      A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
    827      this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
    828      an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
    829      hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
    830      expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
    831      script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
    832      _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
    833      sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
    834 
    835 `--demangle[=STYLE]'
    836 `--no-demangle'
    837      These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
    838      messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
    839      it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
    840      leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
    841      and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
    842      Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
    843      demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
    844      demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
    845      default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
    846      set.  These options may be used to override the default.
    847 
    848 `--dynamic-linker FILE'
    849      Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
    850      generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
    851      linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
    852      you are doing.
    853 
    854 `--fatal-warnings'
    855      Treat all warnings as errors.
    856 
    857 `--force-exe-suffix'
    858      Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
    859 
    860      If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
    861      `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
    862      output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
    863      option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
    864      Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
    865      an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
    866 
    867 `--no-gc-sections'
    868 `--gc-sections'
    869      Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
    870      on targets that do not support this option.  This option is not
    871      compatible with `-r'. The default behaviour (of not performing
    872      this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
    873      `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
    874 
    875 `--help'
    876      Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
    877      and exit.
    878 
    879 `--target-help'
    880      Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
    881      output and exit.
    882 
    883 `-Map MAPFILE'
    884      Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
    885      `-M' option, above.
    886 
    887 `--no-keep-memory'
    888      `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
    889      symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
    890      instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
    891      as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
    892      space while linking a large executable.
    893 
    894 `--no-undefined'
    895 `-z defs'
    896      Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
    897      This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
    898      library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
    899      behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
    900      libraries being linked in.
    901 
    902 `--allow-multiple-definition'
    903 `-z muldefs'
    904      Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
    905      report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
    906      the first definition will be used.
    907 
    908 `--allow-shlib-undefined'
    909 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
    910      Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared
    911      libraries.  This switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that
    912      it determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
    913      shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not
    914      affect how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
    915 
    916      The reason that `--allow-shlib-undefined' is the default is that
    917      the shared library being specified at link time may not be the
    918      same as the one that is available at load time, so the symbols
    919      might actually be resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some
    920      systems, (eg BeOS) where undefined symbols in shared libraries is
    921      normal.  (The kernel patches them at load time to select which
    922      function is most appropriate for the current architecture.  This
    923      is used for example to dynamically select an appropriate memset
    924      function).  Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared libraries
    925      to have undefined symbols.
    926 
    927 `--no-undefined-version'
    928      Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
    929      ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
    930      and a fatal error will be issued instead.
    931 
    932 `--default-symver'
    933      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
    934      unversioned exported symbols.
    935 
    936 `--default-imported-symver'
    937      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
    938      unversioned imported symbols.
    939 
    940 `--no-warn-mismatch'
    941      Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
    942      files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
    943      have been compiled for different processors or for different
    944      endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
    945      permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
    946      care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
    947      ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
    948 
    949 `--no-whole-archive'
    950      Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
    951      archive files.
    952 
    953 `--noinhibit-exec'
    954      Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
    955      Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
    956      encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
    957      writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
    958 
    959 `-nostdlib'
    960      Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
    961      command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
    962      (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
    963      ignored.
    964 
    965 `--oformat OUTPUT-FORMAT'
    966      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    967      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
    968      `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
    969      object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
    970      object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
    971      should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
    972      usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
    973      name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
    974      can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
    975      script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
    976      but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
    977 
    978 `-pie'
    979 `--pic-executable'
    980      Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
    981      supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
    982      similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
    983      dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
    984      (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
    985      linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
    986      executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
    987 
    988 `-qmagic'
    989      This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
    990 
    991 `-Qy'
    992      This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
    993 
    994 `--relax'
    995      An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
    996      supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
    997      *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
    998      Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
    999      PowerPC ELF32.
   1000 
   1001      On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
   1002      optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
   1003      addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
   1004      synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
   1005 
   1006      On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
   1007      symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
   1008      is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
   1009      family of processors.
   1010 
   1011      On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
   1012      but ignored.
   1013 
   1014 `--retain-symbols-file FILENAME'
   1015      Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
   1016      all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
   1017      per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
   1018      as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
   1019      gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
   1020 
   1021      `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
   1022      symbols needed for relocations.
   1023 
   1024      You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
   1025      line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
   1026 
   1027 `-rpath DIR'
   1028      Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
   1029      when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
   1030      arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
   1031      uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
   1032      option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
   1033      by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
   1034      description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
   1035      when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
   1036      variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
   1037 
   1038      The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
   1039      SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
   1040      `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
   1041      runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
   1042      options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
   1043      gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted
   1044      filesystems.
   1045 
   1046      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
   1047      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
   1048      treated as the `-rpath' option.
   1049 
   1050 `-rpath-link DIR'
   1051      When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
   1052      This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
   1053      as one of the input files.
   1054 
   1055      When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
   1056      non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
   1057      locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
   1058      it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
   1059      option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
   1060      `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
   1061      either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
   1062      appearing multiple times.
   1063 
   1064      This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
   1065      path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
   1066      such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
   1067      search path than the runtime linker would do.
   1068 
   1069      The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
   1070      shared libraries.
   1071        1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
   1072 
   1073        2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
   1074           between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
   1075           specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
   1076           and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
   1077           effective at link time. It is for the native linker only.
   1078 
   1079        3. On an ELF system, if the `-rpath' and `rpath-link' options
   1080           were not used, search the contents of the environment variable
   1081           `LD_RUN_PATH'. It is for the native linker only.
   1082 
   1083        4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
   1084           directories specified using `-L' options.
   1085 
   1086        5. For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable
   1087           `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
   1088 
   1089        6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
   1090           `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
   1091           libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
   1092           `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
   1093 
   1094        7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
   1095 
   1096        8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
   1097           `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
   1098           that file.
   1099 
   1100      If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
   1101      a warning and continue with the link.
   1102 
   1103 `-shared'
   1104 `-Bshareable'
   1105      Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
   1106      XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
   1107      automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
   1108      used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
   1109 
   1110 `--sort-common'
   1111      This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by size when it
   1112      places them in the appropriate output sections.  First come all
   1113      the one byte symbols, then all the two byte, then all the four
   1114      byte, and then everything else.  This is to prevent gaps between
   1115      symbols due to alignment constraints.
   1116 
   1117 `--sort-section name'
   1118      This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
   1119      patterns in the linker script.
   1120 
   1121 `--sort-section alignment'
   1122      This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
   1123      patterns in the linker script.
   1124 
   1125 `--split-by-file [SIZE]'
   1126      Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
   1127      each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
   1128      1 if not given.
   1129 
   1130 `--split-by-reloc [COUNT]'
   1131      Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
   1132      single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
   1133      relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
   1134      files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
   1135      object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
   1136      relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
   1137      with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
   1138      The linker will not split up individual input sections for
   1139      redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
   1140      COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
   1141      relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
   1142 
   1143 `--stats'
   1144      Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
   1145      such as execution time and memory usage.
   1146 
   1147 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
   1148      Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
   1149      configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
   1150      that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
   1151 
   1152 `--traditional-format'
   1153      For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
   1154      the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
   1155      use the traditional format instead.
   1156 
   1157      For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
   1158      symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
   1159      with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
   1160      Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
   1161      program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
   1162      tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
   1163 
   1164 `--section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG'
   1165      Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
   1166      by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
   1167      locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
   1168      single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
   1169      you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
   1170      values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
   1171      SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
   1172 
   1173 `-Tbss ORG'
   1174 `-Tdata ORG'
   1175 `-Ttext ORG'
   1176      Same as -section-start, with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
   1177      SECTIONNAME.
   1178 
   1179 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
   1180      Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
   1181      possible values for `method':
   1182 
   1183     `ignore-all'
   1184           Do not report any unresolved symbols.
   1185 
   1186     `report-all'
   1187           Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
   1188 
   1189     `ignore-in-object-files'
   1190           Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
   1191           libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
   1192           files.
   1193 
   1194     `ignore-in-shared-libs'
   1195           Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
   1196           files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
   1197           This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
   1198           known that all the shared libraries that it should be
   1199           referencing are included on the linker's command line.
   1200 
   1201      The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
   1202      controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
   1203 
   1204      Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
   1205      reported unresolved symbol but the option
   1206      `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
   1207 
   1208 `--dll-verbose'
   1209 `--verbose'
   1210      Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
   1211      supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
   1212      Display the linker script being used by the linker.
   1213 
   1214 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
   1215      Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
   1216      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
   1217      additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
   1218      being created.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
   1219      which support shared libraries.  *Note VERSION::.
   1220 
   1221 `--warn-common'
   1222      Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
   1223      or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
   1224      sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
   1225      not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
   1226      combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
   1227      this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
   1228      libraries as well as in your programs.
   1229 
   1230      There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
   1231      examples:
   1232 
   1233     `int i = 1;'
   1234           A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
   1235           the output file.
   1236 
   1237     `extern int i;'
   1238           An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
   1239           must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
   1240           variable somewhere.
   1241 
   1242     `int i;'
   1243           A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
   1244           symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
   1245           area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
   1246           symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
   1247           are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
   1248           linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
   1249           a definition of the same variable.
   1250 
   1251      The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
   1252      Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
   1253      symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
   1254      symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
   1255      symbols will be a common symbol.
   1256 
   1257        1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
   1258           already a definition for the symbol.
   1259                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1260                   overridden by definition
   1261                FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
   1262 
   1263        2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
   1264           definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
   1265           as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
   1266           in a different order.
   1267                FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
   1268                   overriding common
   1269                FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
   1270 
   1271        3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
   1272           symbol.
   1273                FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
   1274                   of `SYMBOL'
   1275                FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
   1276 
   1277        4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
   1278                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1279                   overridden by larger common
   1280                FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
   1281 
   1282        5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
   1283           symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
   1284           the symbols are encountered in a different order.
   1285                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1286                   overriding smaller common
   1287                FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
   1288 
   1289 `--warn-constructors'
   1290      Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
   1291      a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
   1292      linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
   1293 
   1294 `--warn-multiple-gp'
   1295      Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
   1296      file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
   1297      Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
   1298      in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
   1299      points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
   1300      loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
   1301      Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
   1302      relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
   1303      the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
   1304      to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
   1305      address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
   1306      be issued whenever this case occurs.
   1307 
   1308 `--warn-once'
   1309      Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
   1310      module which refers to it.
   1311 
   1312 `--warn-section-align'
   1313      Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
   1314      alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
   1315      section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
   1316      specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
   1317      start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
   1318 
   1319 `--warn-shared-textrel'
   1320      Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
   1321 
   1322 `--warn-unresolved-symbols'
   1323      If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
   1324      option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
   1325      This option makes it generate a warning instead.
   1326 
   1327 `--error-unresolved-symbols'
   1328      This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
   1329      when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
   1330 
   1331 `--whole-archive'
   1332      For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
   1333      `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
   1334      in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
   1335      object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
   1336      a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
   1337      resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
   1338 
   1339      Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
   1340      about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
   1341      Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
   1342      list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
   1343      your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
   1344 
   1345 `--wrap SYMBOL'
   1346      Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
   1347      SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
   1348      reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
   1349 
   1350      This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
   1351      wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
   1352      to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
   1353 
   1354      Here is a trivial example:
   1355 
   1356           void *
   1357           __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
   1358           {
   1359             printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
   1360             return __real_malloc (c);
   1361           }
   1362 
   1363      If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
   1364      all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
   1365      instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
   1366      the real `malloc' function.
   1367 
   1368      You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
   1369      links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
   1370      you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
   1371      file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
   1372      call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
   1373 
   1374 `--eh-frame-hdr'
   1375      Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
   1376      `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
   1377 
   1378 `--enable-new-dtags'
   1379 `--disable-new-dtags'
   1380      This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
   1381      ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
   1382      `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
   1383      If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
   1384      created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
   1385      that those options are only available for ELF systems.
   1386 
   1387 `--hash-size=NUMBER'
   1388      Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
   1389      close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
   1390      time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
   1391      increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
   1392      this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
   1393      speed.
   1394 
   1395 `--reduce-memory-overheads'
   1396      This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
   1397      expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
   1398      O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
   1399      O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
   1400 
   1401      Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
   1402      to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
   1403      linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
   1404      switch has been used.
   1405 
   1406      The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
   1407      enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
   1408 
   1409 
   1410 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
   1411 -----------------------------------------
   1412 
   1413 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
   1414 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
   1415 executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
   1416 option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
   1417 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
   1418 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
   1419 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
   1420 
   1421    In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
   1422 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
   1423 PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
   1424 by either a space or an equals sign.
   1425 
   1426 `--add-stdcall-alias'
   1427      If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
   1428      as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
   1429      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1430 
   1431 `--base-file FILE'
   1432      Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
   1433      of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
   1434      [This is an i386 PE specific option]
   1435 
   1436 `--dll'
   1437      Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
   1438      `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
   1439      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1440 
   1441 `--enable-stdcall-fixup'
   1442 `--disable-stdcall-fixup'
   1443      If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
   1444      to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
   1445      differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
   1446      and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
   1447      example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
   1448      function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
   1449      linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
   1450      prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
   1451      but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
   1452      need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
   1453      `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
   1454      warnings are not printed.  If you specify
   1455      `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
   1456      mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
   1457      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1458 
   1459 `--export-all-symbols'
   1460      If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
   1461      will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
   1462      there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
   1463      explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
   1464      function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
   1465      unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
   1466      `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
   1467      not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
   1468      DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
   1469      DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
   1470      ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
   1471      `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
   1472      whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
   1473      exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
   1474      list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
   1475      this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
   1476      cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1477      `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1478      `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
   1479      `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
   1480      `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1481      of the linker]
   1482 
   1483 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
   1484      Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
   1485      exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
   1486      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1487      linker]
   1488 
   1489 `--file-alignment'
   1490      Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
   1491      begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
   1492      defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
   1493      port of the linker]
   1494 
   1495 `--heap RESERVE'
   1496 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1497      Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to
   1498      be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
   1499      committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1500      of the linker]
   1501 
   1502 `--image-base VALUE'
   1503      Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
   1504      lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
   1505      is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
   1506      of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
   1507      overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
   1508      and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1509      targeted port of the linker]
   1510 
   1511 `--kill-at'
   1512      If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
   1513      before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1514      targeted port of the linker]
   1515 
   1516 `--large-address-aware'
   1517      If given, the appropriate bit in the "Charateristics" field of the
   1518      COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
   1519      virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
   1520      in conjuction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
   1521      the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
   1522      this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
   1523      ports of the linker]
   1524 
   1525 `--major-image-version VALUE'
   1526      Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
   1527      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1528      linker]
   1529 
   1530 `--major-os-version VALUE'
   1531      Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
   1532      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1533 
   1534 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1535      Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
   1536      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1537      linker]
   1538 
   1539 `--minor-image-version VALUE'
   1540      Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
   1541      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1542      linker]
   1543 
   1544 `--minor-os-version VALUE'
   1545      Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
   1546      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1547 
   1548 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1549      Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
   1550      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1551      linker]
   1552 
   1553 `--output-def FILE'
   1554      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
   1555      corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
   1556      (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
   1557      library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
   1558      automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
   1559      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1560 
   1561 `--out-implib FILE'
   1562      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
   1563      lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
   1564      lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
   1565      clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
   1566      possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
   1567      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1568      linker]
   1569 
   1570 `--enable-auto-image-base'
   1571      Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
   1572      specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
   1573      generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
   1574      DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
   1575      execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1576      targeted port of the linker]
   1577 
   1578 `--disable-auto-image-base'
   1579      Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
   1580      user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
   1581      default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1582      the linker]
   1583 
   1584 `--dll-search-prefix STRING'
   1585      When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
   1586      search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
   1587      `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
   1588      between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
   1589      uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
   1590      `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
   1591      PE targeted port of the linker]
   1592 
   1593 `--enable-auto-import'
   1594      Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
   1595      imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
   1596      building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
   1597      of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
   1598      image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
   1599      PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
   1600 
   1601      Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
   1602      may see this message:
   1603 
   1604      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   1605      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   1606 
   1607      This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
   1608      ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
   1609      only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
   1610      to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
   1611      as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
   1612      DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
   1613      trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
   1614      data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
   1615      detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
   1616 
   1617      There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
   1618      the data type of the exported variable:
   1619 
   1620      One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
   1621      the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
   1622      environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
   1623      supports this feature.
   1624 
   1625      A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
   1626      variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
   1627      For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
   1628      array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
   1629      variable.  Thus:
   1630 
   1631           extern type extern_array[];
   1632           extern_array[1] -->
   1633              { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
   1634 
   1635      or
   1636 
   1637           extern type extern_array[];
   1638           extern_array[1] -->
   1639              { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
   1640 
   1641      For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
   1642      is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
   1643      variable:
   1644 
   1645           extern struct s extern_struct;
   1646           extern_struct.field -->
   1647              { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
   1648 
   1649      or
   1650 
   1651           extern long long extern_ll;
   1652           extern_ll -->
   1653             { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
   1654 
   1655      A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
   1656      'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
   1657      `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
   1658      compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
   1659      building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
   1660      building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
   1661      between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
   1662      constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
   1663      usage:
   1664 
   1665      Original:
   1666           --foo.h
   1667           extern int arr[];
   1668           --foo.c
   1669           #include "foo.h"
   1670           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1671             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1672           }
   1673 
   1674      Solution 1:
   1675           --foo.h
   1676           extern int arr[];
   1677           --foo.c
   1678           #include "foo.h"
   1679           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1680             /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
   1681             volatile int *parr = arr;
   1682             printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
   1683           }
   1684 
   1685      Solution 2:
   1686           --foo.h
   1687           /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
   1688           #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
   1689             !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
   1690           #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
   1691           #else
   1692           #define FOO_IMPORT
   1693           #endif
   1694           extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
   1695           --foo.c
   1696           #include "foo.h"
   1697           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1698             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1699           }
   1700 
   1701      A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
   1702      use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
   1703      offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
   1704      functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1705      of the linker]
   1706 
   1707 `--disable-auto-import'
   1708      Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
   1709      `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
   1710      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1711 
   1712 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1713      If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
   1714      section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
   1715      switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
   1716      can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
   1717      data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1718      targeted port of the linker]
   1719 
   1720 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1721      Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
   1722      from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
   1723      i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1724 
   1725 `--enable-extra-pe-debug'
   1726      Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
   1727      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1728      linker]
   1729 
   1730 `--section-alignment'
   1731      Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
   1732      at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
   1733      0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1734      the linker]
   1735 
   1736 `--stack RESERVE'
   1737 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1738      Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to
   1739      be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
   1740      committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1741      of the linker]
   1742 
   1743 `--subsystem WHICH'
   1744 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
   1745 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
   1746      Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
   1747      legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
   1748      `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
   1749      also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
   1750      is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1751 
   1752 
   1753 
   1754 File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
   1755 
   1756 2.2 Environment Variables
   1757 =========================
   1758 
   1759 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
   1760 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
   1761 
   1762    `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
   1763 `-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
   1764 names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
   1765 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
   1766 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
   1767 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
   1768 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
   1769 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
   1770 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
   1771 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
   1772 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
   1773 
   1774    `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
   1775 `-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
   1776 behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
   1777 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
   1778 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
   1779 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
   1780 configured.
   1781 
   1782    Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
   1783 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
   1784 to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
   1785 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
   1786 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
   1787 
   1788 
   1789 File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
   1790 
   1791 3 Linker Scripts
   1792 ****************
   1793 
   1794 Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
   1795 in the linker command language.
   1796 
   1797    The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
   1798 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
   1799 to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
   1800 do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
   1801 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
   1802 commands described below.
   1803 
   1804    The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
   1805 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
   1806 linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
   1807 display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
   1808 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
   1809 
   1810    You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
   1811 option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
   1812 linker script.
   1813 
   1814    You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
   1815 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
   1816 Implicit Linker Scripts::.
   1817 
   1818 * Menu:
   1819 
   1820 * Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
   1821 * Script Format::		Linker Script Format
   1822 * Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
   1823 * Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
   1824 * Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
   1825 * SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
   1826 * MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
   1827 * PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
   1828 * VERSION::			VERSION Command
   1829 * Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
   1830 * Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
   1831 
   1832 
   1833 File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   1834 
   1835 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
   1836 ================================
   1837 
   1838 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
   1839 describe the linker script language.
   1840 
   1841    The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
   1842 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
   1843 "object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
   1844 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
   1845 will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
   1846 things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
   1847 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
   1848 file is an "output section".
   1849 
   1850    Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
   1851 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
   1852 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
   1853 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
   1854 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
   1855 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
   1856 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
   1857 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
   1858 debugging information.
   1859 
   1860    Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
   1861 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
   1862 section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
   1863 "LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
   1864 section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
   1865 same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
   1866 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
   1867 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
   1868 based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
   1869 RAM address would be the VMA.
   1870 
   1871    You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
   1872 program with the `-h' option.
   1873 
   1874    Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
   1875 table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
   1876 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
   1877 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
   1878 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
   1879 variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
   1880 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
   1881 
   1882    You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
   1883 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
   1884 
   1885 
   1886 File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
   1887 
   1888 3.2 Linker Script Format
   1889 ========================
   1890 
   1891 Linker scripts are text files.
   1892 
   1893    You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
   1894 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
   1895 symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
   1896 generally ignored.
   1897 
   1898    Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
   1899 directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
   1900 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
   1901 in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
   1902 file name.
   1903 
   1904    You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
   1905 `/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
   1906 whitespace.
   1907 
   1908 
   1909 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   1910 
   1911 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
   1912 ================================
   1913 
   1914 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
   1915 
   1916    The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
   1917 `SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
   1918 layout of the output file.
   1919 
   1920    The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
   1921 a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
   1922 initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
   1923 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
   1924 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
   1925 files.
   1926 
   1927    For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
   1928 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
   1929 linker script which will do that:
   1930      SECTIONS
   1931      {
   1932        . = 0x10000;
   1933        .text : { *(.text) }
   1934        . = 0x8000000;
   1935        .data : { *(.data) }
   1936        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   1937      }
   1938 
   1939    You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
   1940 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
   1941 enclosed in curly braces.
   1942 
   1943    The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
   1944 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
   1945 counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
   1946 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
   1947 current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
   1948 incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
   1949 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
   1950 
   1951    The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
   1952 required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
   1953 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
   1954 which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
   1955 which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
   1956 `.text' input sections in all input files.
   1957 
   1958    Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
   1959 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
   1960 section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
   1961 
   1962    The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
   1963 output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
   1964 address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
   1965 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
   1966 size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
   1967 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
   1968 section in memory.
   1969 
   1970    The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
   1971 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
   1972 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
   1973 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
   1974 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
   1975 
   1976    That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
   1977 
   1978 
   1979 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
   1980 
   1981 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
   1982 =================================
   1983 
   1984 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
   1985 
   1986 * Menu:
   1987 
   1988 * Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
   1989 * File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
   1990 
   1991 * Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
   1992 
   1993 * Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
   1994 
   1995 
   1996 File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   1997 
   1998 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
   1999 -----------------------------
   2000 
   2001 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
   2002 point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
   2003 point.  The argument is a symbol name:
   2004      ENTRY(SYMBOL)
   2005 
   2006    There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
   2007 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
   2008 stopping when one of them succeeds:
   2009    * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
   2010 
   2011    * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
   2012 
   2013    * the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
   2014 
   2015    * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
   2016 
   2017    * The address `0'.
   2018 
   2019 
   2020 File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
   2021 
   2022 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
   2023 ---------------------------------
   2024 
   2025 Several linker script commands deal with files.
   2026 
   2027 `INCLUDE FILENAME'
   2028      Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
   2029      be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
   2030      specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
   2031      up to 10 levels deep.
   2032 
   2033 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2034 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
   2035      The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
   2036      in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
   2037 
   2038      For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
   2039      a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
   2040      line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
   2041 
   2042      In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
   2043      linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
   2044      option.
   2045 
   2046      In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
   2047      with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
   2048      inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
   2049      the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
   2050      file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
   2051      will search through the archive library search path.  See the
   2052      description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2053 
   2054      If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
   2055      `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
   2056 
   2057      When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
   2058      files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
   2059      script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
   2060 
   2061 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2062 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
   2063      The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
   2064      should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
   2065      new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
   2066      in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2067 
   2068 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2069 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
   2070      This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
   2071      commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
   2072      as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
   2073      with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
   2074      when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
   2075      `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
   2076      restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
   2077      afterwards.
   2078 
   2079 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
   2080      The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
   2081      `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
   2082      FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
   2083      Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
   2084      precedence.
   2085 
   2086      You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
   2087      output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
   2088 
   2089 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
   2090      The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
   2091      looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
   2092      like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
   2093      Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
   2094      both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
   2095      searched first.
   2096 
   2097 `STARTUP(FILENAME)'
   2098      The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
   2099      that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
   2100      though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
   2101      useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
   2102      start of the first file.
   2103 
   2104 
   2105 File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2106 
   2107 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
   2108 -----------------------------------------------
   2109 
   2110 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
   2111 
   2112 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
   2113 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
   2114      The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
   2115      output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
   2116      exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2117      Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
   2118      line option takes precedence.
   2119 
   2120      You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
   2121      formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
   2122      permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
   2123      desired endianness.
   2124 
   2125      If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
   2126      be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
   2127      format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
   2128      output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
   2129 
   2130      For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
   2131      uses this command:
   2132           OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
   2133      This says that the default format for the output file is
   2134      `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
   2135      option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
   2136      format.
   2137 
   2138 `TARGET(BFDNAME)'
   2139      The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
   2140      files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
   2141      command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2142      Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
   2143      but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
   2144      used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
   2145 
   2146 
   2147 File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2148 
   2149 3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
   2150 ----------------------------------
   2151 
   2152 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
   2153 
   2154 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
   2155      Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
   2156      with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
   2157 
   2158 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
   2159      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
   2160      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
   2161      modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
   2162      each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
   2163      command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
   2164 
   2165 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2166      This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
   2167      to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
   2168      output file is specified (`-r').
   2169 
   2170 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2171      This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
   2172      command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
   2173      to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
   2174 
   2175 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
   2176      This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
   2177      references among certain output sections.
   2178 
   2179      In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
   2180      using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
   2181      section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
   2182      sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
   2183      code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
   2184 
   2185      The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
   2186      `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
   2187      an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
   2188      `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
   2189      names.
   2190 
   2191 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
   2192      Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
   2193      one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
   2194      see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
   2195      program with the `-f' option.
   2196 
   2197 
   2198 File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
   2199 
   2200 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
   2201 ===============================
   2202 
   2203 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
   2204 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
   2205 
   2206 * Menu:
   2207 
   2208 * Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
   2209 * PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
   2210 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2211 * Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
   2212 
   2213 
   2214 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2215 
   2216 3.5.1 Simple Assignments
   2217 ------------------------
   2218 
   2219 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
   2220 
   2221 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
   2222 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
   2223 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
   2224 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
   2225 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
   2226 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
   2227 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
   2228 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
   2229 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
   2230 
   2231    The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
   2232 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
   2233 adjusted accordingly.
   2234 
   2235    The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
   2236 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
   2237 
   2238    The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
   2239 
   2240    Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
   2241 
   2242    You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
   2243 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
   2244 section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
   2245 
   2246    The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
   2247 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
   2248 
   2249    Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
   2250 assignments may be used:
   2251 
   2252      floating_point = 0;
   2253      SECTIONS
   2254      {
   2255        .text :
   2256          {
   2257            *(.text)
   2258            _etext = .;
   2259          }
   2260        _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
   2261        .data : { *(.data) }
   2262      }
   2263    In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
   2264 zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
   2265 last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
   2266 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
   2267 boundary.
   2268 
   2269 
   2270 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
   2271 
   2272 3.5.2 PROVIDE
   2273 -------------
   2274 
   2275 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
   2276 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
   2277 the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
   2278 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
   2279 function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
   2280 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
   2281 but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
   2282 
   2283    Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
   2284      SECTIONS
   2285      {
   2286        .text :
   2287          {
   2288            *(.text)
   2289            _etext = .;
   2290            PROVIDE(etext = .);
   2291          }
   2292      }
   2293 
   2294    In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
   2295 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
   2296 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
   2297 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
   2298 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
   2299 will use the definition in the linker script.
   2300 
   2301 
   2302 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2303 
   2304 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2305 --------------------
   2306 
   2307 Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
   2308 hidden and won't be exported.
   2309 
   2310 
   2311 File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
   2312 
   2313 3.5.4 Source Code Reference
   2314 ---------------------------
   2315 
   2316 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
   2317 intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
   2318 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
   2319 that does not have a value.
   2320 
   2321    Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
   2322 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
   2323 stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
   2324 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
   2325 mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
   2326 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
   2327 variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
   2328 linker script variable might be referred to as:
   2329 
   2330        extern int foo;
   2331 
   2332    But in the linker script it might be defined as:
   2333 
   2334        _foo = 1000;
   2335 
   2336    In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
   2337 transformation has taken place.
   2338 
   2339    When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
   2340 things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
   2341 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
   2342 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
   2343 holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
   2344 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
   2345 following C declaration, at file scope:
   2346 
   2347        int foo = 1000;
   2348 
   2349    creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
   2350 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
   2351 initially stored.
   2352 
   2353    When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
   2354 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
   2355 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
   2356 So:
   2357 
   2358        foo = 1;
   2359 
   2360    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
   2361 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
   2362 address.  Whereas:
   2363 
   2364        int * a = & foo;
   2365 
   2366    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
   2367 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
   2368 variable `a'.
   2369 
   2370    Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
   2371 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
   2372 an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
   2373 definition:
   2374 
   2375        foo = 1000;
   2376 
   2377    creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
   2378 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
   2379 address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
   2380 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
   2381 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
   2382 
   2383    Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
   2384 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
   2385 attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
   2386 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
   2387 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
   2388 
   2389        start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
   2390        end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
   2391        start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
   2392 
   2393    Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
   2394 
   2395        extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
   2396 
   2397        memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
   2398 
   2399    Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
   2400 
   2401 
   2402 File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
   2403 
   2404 3.6 SECTIONS Command
   2405 ====================
   2406 
   2407 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
   2408 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
   2409 
   2410    The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
   2411      SECTIONS
   2412      {
   2413        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2414        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2415        ...
   2416      }
   2417 
   2418    Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
   2419 
   2420    * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   2421 
   2422    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2423 
   2424    * an output section description
   2425 
   2426    * an overlay description
   2427 
   2428    The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
   2429 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
   2430 those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
   2431 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
   2432 the layout of the output file.
   2433 
   2434    Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
   2435 below.
   2436 
   2437    If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
   2438 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
   2439 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
   2440 input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
   2441 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
   2442 in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
   2443 
   2444 * Menu:
   2445 
   2446 * Output Section Description::	Output section description
   2447 * Output Section Name::		Output section name
   2448 * Output Section Address::	Output section address
   2449 * Input Section::		Input section description
   2450 * Output Section Data::		Output section data
   2451 * Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
   2452 * Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
   2453 * Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
   2454 * Overlay Description::		Overlay description
   2455 
   2456 
   2457 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2458 
   2459 3.6.1 Output Section Description
   2460 --------------------------------
   2461 
   2462 The full description of an output section looks like this:
   2463      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2464        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2465        {
   2466          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2467          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2468          ...
   2469        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2470 
   2471    Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
   2472 attributes.
   2473 
   2474    The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
   2475 is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
   2476 line breaks and other white space are optional.
   2477 
   2478    Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
   2479 
   2480    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2481 
   2482    * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   2483 
   2484    * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   2485 
   2486    * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
   2487 
   2488 
   2489 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
   2490 
   2491 3.6.2 Output Section Name
   2492 -------------------------
   2493 
   2494 The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
   2495 constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
   2496 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
   2497 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
   2498 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
   2499 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
   2500 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
   2501 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
   2502 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
   2503 
   2504    The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
   2505 Discarding::.
   2506 
   2507 
   2508 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2509 
   2510 3.6.3 Output Section Address
   2511 ----------------------------
   2512 
   2513 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
   2514 of the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
   2515 set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
   2516 value of the location counter.
   2517 
   2518    If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
   2519 set to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
   2520 the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
   2521 the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
   2522 output section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
   2523 strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
   2524 section.
   2525 
   2526    For example,
   2527      .text . : { *(.text) }
   2528    and
   2529      .text : { *(.text) }
   2530    are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
   2531 output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
   2532 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
   2533 to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
   2534 
   2535    The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
   2536 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
   2537 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
   2538 do something like this:
   2539      .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
   2540    This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
   2541 aligned upward to the specified value.
   2542 
   2543    Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
   2544 location counter.
   2545 
   2546 
   2547 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
   2548 
   2549 3.6.4 Input Section Description
   2550 -------------------------------
   2551 
   2552 The most common output section command is an input section description.
   2553 
   2554    The input section description is the most basic linker script
   2555 operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
   2556 your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
   2557 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
   2558 
   2559 * Menu:
   2560 
   2561 * Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
   2562 * Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
   2563 * Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
   2564 * Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
   2565 * Input Section Example::	Input section example
   2566 
   2567 
   2568 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2569 
   2570 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
   2571 ............................
   2572 
   2573 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
   2574 by a list of section names in parentheses.
   2575 
   2576    The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
   2577 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
   2578 
   2579    The most common input section description is to include all input
   2580 sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
   2581 include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
   2582      *(.text)
   2583    Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
   2584 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
   2585 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
   2586 EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
   2587      (*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors))
   2588    will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
   2589 `otherfile.o' to be included.
   2590 
   2591    There are two ways to include more than one section:
   2592      *(.text .rdata)
   2593      *(.text) *(.rdata)
   2594    The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
   2595 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
   2596 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
   2597 they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
   2598 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
   2599 sections.
   2600 
   2601    You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
   2602 file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
   2603 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
   2604      data.o(.data)
   2605 
   2606    If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
   2607 in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
   2608 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
   2609      data.o
   2610 
   2611    When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
   2612 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
   2613 name on the linker command line or in an `INPUT' command.  If you did
   2614 not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
   2615 though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an
   2616 `INPUT' command, because the linker will not search for the file in the
   2617 archive search path.
   2618 
   2619 
   2620 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
   2621 
   2622 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
   2623 .......................................
   2624 
   2625 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
   2626 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
   2627 
   2628    The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
   2629 pattern for the file name.
   2630 
   2631    The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
   2632 
   2633 `*'
   2634      matches any number of characters
   2635 
   2636 `?'
   2637      matches any single character
   2638 
   2639 `[CHARS]'
   2640      matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
   2641      may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
   2642      match any lower case letter
   2643 
   2644 `\'
   2645      quotes the following character
   2646 
   2647    When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
   2648 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
   2649 Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
   2650 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
   2651 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
   2652 
   2653    File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
   2654 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
   2655 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
   2656 
   2657    If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
   2658 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
   2659 linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
   2660 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
   2661 `data.o' rule will not be used:
   2662      .data : { *(.data) }
   2663      .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
   2664 
   2665    Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
   2666 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
   2667 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
   2668 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
   2669 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
   2670 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
   2671 file.
   2672 
   2673    `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   2674 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
   2675 order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
   2676 
   2677    `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
   2678 
   2679    When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
   2680 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
   2681 
   2682   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2683      It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
   2684      if 2 sections have the same name.
   2685 
   2686   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2687      It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
   2688      if 2 sections have the same alignment.
   2689 
   2690   3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
   2691      treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
   2692 
   2693   4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
   2694      pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
   2695      section pattern).
   2696 
   2697   5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
   2698 
   2699    When both command line section sorting option and linker script
   2700 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
   2701 precedence over the command line option.
   2702 
   2703    If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
   2704 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
   2705 as nested sorting command.
   2706 
   2707   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
   2708      alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2709      (wildcard section pattern)).
   2710 
   2711   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
   2712      `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2713      (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2714 
   2715    If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
   2716 command line option will be ignored.
   2717 
   2718    If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
   2719 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
   2720 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
   2721 
   2722    This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
   2723 files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
   2724 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
   2725 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
   2726 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
   2727 `.data' section in `.data'.
   2728      SECTIONS {
   2729        .text : { *(.text) }
   2730        .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
   2731        .data : { *(.data) }
   2732        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2733      }
   2734 
   2735 
   2736 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2737 
   2738 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
   2739 ........................................
   2740 
   2741 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
   2742 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
   2743 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
   2744 named `COMMON'.
   2745 
   2746    You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
   2747 other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
   2748 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
   2749 input files are placed in another section.
   2750 
   2751    In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
   2752 `.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
   2753      .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
   2754 
   2755    Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
   2756 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
   2757 common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
   2758 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
   2759 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
   2760 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
   2761 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
   2762 locations.
   2763 
   2764    You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
   2765 notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
   2766 
   2767 
   2768 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
   2769 
   2770 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
   2771 ............................................
   2772 
   2773 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
   2774 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
   2775 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
   2776 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
   2777 
   2778 
   2779 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
   2780 
   2781 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
   2782 .............................
   2783 
   2784 The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
   2785 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
   2786 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
   2787 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
   2788 same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
   2789 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
   2790 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
   2791 are written to output section `outputc'.
   2792 
   2793      SECTIONS {
   2794        outputa 0x10000 :
   2795          {
   2796          all.o
   2797          foo.o (.input1)
   2798          }
   2799        outputb :
   2800          {
   2801          foo.o (.input2)
   2802          foo1.o (.input1)
   2803          }
   2804        outputc :
   2805          {
   2806          *(.input1)
   2807          *(.input2)
   2808          }
   2809      }
   2810 
   2811 
   2812 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
   2813 
   2814 3.6.5 Output Section Data
   2815 -------------------------
   2816 
   2817 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
   2818 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
   2819 command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
   2820 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
   2821 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
   2822 
   2823    The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
   2824 four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
   2825 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
   2826 
   2827    For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
   2828 value of the symbol `addr':
   2829      BYTE(1)
   2830      LONG(addr)
   2831 
   2832    When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
   2833 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
   2834 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
   2835 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
   2836 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
   2837 
   2838    If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
   2839 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
   2840 endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
   2841 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
   2842 stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
   2843 
   2844    Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
   2845 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
   2846      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
   2847    whereas this will work:
   2848      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
   2849 
   2850    You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
   2851 current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
   2852 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
   2853 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
   2854 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
   2855 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
   2856 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
   2857 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
   2858 section.
   2859 
   2860    This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
   2861 value `0x90':
   2862      FILL(0x90909090)
   2863 
   2864    The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
   2865 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
   2866 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
   2867 `FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
   2868 details on the fill expression.
   2869 
   2870 
   2871 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
   2872 
   2873 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
   2874 -----------------------------
   2875 
   2876 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
   2877 commands.
   2878 
   2879 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
   2880      The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
   2881      file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
   2882      corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
   2883      output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
   2884      appears.
   2885 
   2886      This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
   2887      normally used for any other object file format.
   2888 
   2889 `CONSTRUCTORS'
   2890      When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
   2891      unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
   2892      destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
   2893      arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
   2894      automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
   2895      name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
   2896      tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
   2897      section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
   2898      `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
   2899 
   2900      The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
   2901      constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
   2902      Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
   2903      end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
   2904      number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
   2905      destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
   2906      actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
   2907      normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
   2908      `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
   2909      `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
   2910      `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
   2911 
   2912      For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
   2913      arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
   2914      addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
   2915      and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
   2916      linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
   2917      runtime code expects to see.
   2918 
   2919                 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
   2920                 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   2921                 *(.ctors)
   2922                 LONG(0)
   2923                 __CTOR_END__ = .;
   2924                 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
   2925                 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   2926                 *(.dtors)
   2927                 LONG(0)
   2928                 __DTOR_END__ = .;
   2929 
   2930      If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
   2931      which provides some control over the order in which global
   2932      constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
   2933      to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
   2934      the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
   2935      instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
   2936      `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
   2937      just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
   2938 
   2939      Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
   2940      automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
   2941      them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
   2942      and writing your own linker scripts.
   2943 
   2944 
   2945 
   2946 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
   2947 
   2948 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
   2949 -------------------------------
   2950 
   2951 The linker will not create output section which do not have any
   2952 contents.  This is for convenience when referring to input sections that
   2953 may or may not be present in any of the input files.  For example:
   2954      .foo { *(.foo) }
   2955    will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
   2956 `.foo' section in at least one input file.
   2957 
   2958    If you use anything other than an input section description as an
   2959 output section command, such as a symbol assignment, then the output
   2960 section will always be created, even if there are no matching input
   2961 sections.
   2962 
   2963    The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
   2964 input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
   2965 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
   2966 
   2967 
   2968 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
   2969 
   2970 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
   2971 -------------------------------
   2972 
   2973 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
   2974 like this:
   2975      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2976        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2977        {
   2978          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2979          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2980          ...
   2981        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2982 We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
   2983 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
   2984 section attributes.
   2985 
   2986 * Menu:
   2987 
   2988 * Output Section Type::		Output section type
   2989 * Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
   2990 * Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
   2991 * Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
   2992 * Output Section Region::	Output section region
   2993 * Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
   2994 * Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
   2995 
   2996 
   2997 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   2998 
   2999 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
   3000 ...........................
   3001 
   3002 Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
   3003 parentheses.  The following types are defined:
   3004 
   3005 `NOLOAD'
   3006      The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
   3007      be loaded into memory when the program is run.
   3008 
   3009 `DSECT'
   3010 `COPY'
   3011 `INFO'
   3012 `OVERLAY'
   3013      These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
   3014      rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
   3015      marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
   3016      section when the program is run.
   3017 
   3018    The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
   3019 the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
   3020 the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
   3021 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
   3022 loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the `ROM' section will
   3023 appear in the linker output file as usual.
   3024      SECTIONS {
   3025        ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
   3026        ...
   3027      }
   3028 
   3029 
   3030 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3031 
   3032 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
   3033 ..........................
   3034 
   3035 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
   3036 *Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
   3037 in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
   3038 Address::).
   3039 
   3040    The linker will normally set the LMA equal to the VMA.  You can
   3041 change that by using the `AT' keyword.  The expression LMA that follows
   3042 the `AT' keyword specifies the load address of the section.
   3043 
   3044    Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
   3045 memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::.  Note
   3046 that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
   3047 will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.  *Note Output
   3048 Section Region::.
   3049 
   3050    This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
   3051 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
   3052 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
   3053 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
   3054 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
   3055 `0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
   3056 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
   3057 
   3058      SECTIONS
   3059        {
   3060        .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
   3061        .mdata 0x2000 :
   3062          AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
   3063          { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
   3064        .bss 0x3000 :
   3065          { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
   3066      }
   3067 
   3068    The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
   3069 with this linker script would include something like the following, to
   3070 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
   3071 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
   3072 linker script.
   3073 
   3074      extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
   3075      char *src = &_etext;
   3076      char *dst = &_data;
   3077 
   3078      /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
   3079      while (dst < &_edata) {
   3080        *dst++ = *src++;
   3081      }
   3082 
   3083      /* Zero bss */
   3084      for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
   3085        *dst = 0;
   3086 
   3087 
   3088 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3089 
   3090 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
   3091 ...............................
   3092 
   3093 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
   3094 
   3095 
   3096 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3097 
   3098 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
   3099 ..............................
   3100 
   3101 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
   3102 SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
   3103 sections, whether larger or smaller.
   3104 
   3105 
   3106 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3107 
   3108 3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
   3109 .............................
   3110 
   3111 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
   3112 using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
   3113 
   3114    Here is a simple example:
   3115      MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
   3116      SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
   3117 
   3118 
   3119 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3120 
   3121 3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
   3122 ...........................
   3123 
   3124 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
   3125 using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
   3126 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
   3127 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
   3128 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
   3129 segment at all.
   3130 
   3131    Here is a simple example:
   3132      PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
   3133      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
   3134 
   3135 
   3136 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3137 
   3138 3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
   3139 ...........................
   3140 
   3141 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
   3142 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
   3143 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
   3144 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
   3145 filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
   3146 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
   3147 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
   3148 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
   3149 become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
   3150 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
   3151 significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
   3152 number is big-endian.
   3153 
   3154    You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
   3155 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
   3156 
   3157    Here is a simple example:
   3158      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
   3159 
   3160 
   3161 File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
   3162 
   3163 3.6.9 Overlay Description
   3164 -------------------------
   3165 
   3166 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
   3167 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
   3168 the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
   3169 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
   3170 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
   3171 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
   3172 than another.
   3173 
   3174    Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
   3175 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
   3176 description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
   3177      OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
   3178        {
   3179          SECNAME1
   3180            {
   3181              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3182              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3183              ...
   3184            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3185          SECNAME2
   3186            {
   3187              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3188              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3189              ...
   3190            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3191          ...
   3192        } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3193 
   3194    Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
   3195 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
   3196 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
   3197 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
   3198 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
   3199 an `OVERLAY'.
   3200 
   3201    The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
   3202 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
   3203 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
   3204 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
   3205 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
   3206 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
   3207 location counter).
   3208 
   3209    If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
   3210 the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
   3211 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
   3212 section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
   3213 Commands.
   3214 
   3215    For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
   3216 defines two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
   3217 the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
   3218 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
   3219 section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
   3220 identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
   3221 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
   3222 
   3223    At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
   3224 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
   3225 section.
   3226 
   3227    Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
   3228 `SECTIONS' construct.
   3229        OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
   3230         {
   3231           .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3232           .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3233         }
   3234 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
   3235 0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
   3236 be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
   3237 defined: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
   3238 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
   3239 
   3240    C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
   3241 like the following.
   3242 
   3243        extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
   3244        memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
   3245                &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
   3246 
   3247    Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
   3248 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
   3249 example could have been written identically as follows.
   3250 
   3251        .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3252        __load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0);
   3253        __load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0);
   3254        .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3255        __load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1);
   3256        __load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1);
   3257        . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
   3258 
   3259 
   3260 File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
   3261 
   3262 3.7 MEMORY Command
   3263 ==================
   3264 
   3265 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
   3266 memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
   3267 
   3268    The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
   3269 memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
   3270 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
   3271 can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
   3272 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
   3273 regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
   3274 around to fit into the available regions.
   3275 
   3276    A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
   3277 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
   3278 wish.  The syntax is:
   3279      MEMORY
   3280        {
   3281          NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
   3282          ...
   3283        }
   3284 
   3285    The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
   3286 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
   3287 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3288 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
   3289 have a distinct name.
   3290 
   3291    The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
   3292 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
   3293 not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
   3294 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
   3295 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
   3296 the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
   3297 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
   3298 
   3299    The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
   3300 `R'
   3301      Read-only section
   3302 
   3303 `W'
   3304      Read/write section
   3305 
   3306 `X'
   3307      Executable section
   3308 
   3309 `A'
   3310      Allocatable section
   3311 
   3312 `I'
   3313      Initialized section
   3314 
   3315 `L'
   3316      Same as `I'
   3317 
   3318 `!'
   3319      Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
   3320 
   3321    If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
   3322 `!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
   3323 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
   3324 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
   3325 
   3326    The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
   3327 memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
   3328 cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
   3329 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
   3330 
   3331    The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
   3332 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
   3333 and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
   3334 abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
   3335 
   3336    In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
   3337 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
   3338 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
   3339 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
   3340 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
   3341 executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
   3342 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
   3343 
   3344      MEMORY
   3345        {
   3346          rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
   3347          ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
   3348        }
   3349 
   3350    Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
   3351 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
   3352 output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
   3353 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
   3354 *Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
   3355 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
   3356 address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
   3357 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
   3358 will issue an error message.
   3359 
   3360    It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
   3361 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
   3362 
   3363        _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
   3364 
   3365 
   3366 File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
   3367 
   3368 3.8 PHDRS Command
   3369 =================
   3370 
   3371 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
   3372 "segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
   3373 loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
   3374 program with the `-p' option.
   3375 
   3376    When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
   3377 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
   3378 program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
   3379 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
   3380 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
   3381 
   3382    The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
   3383 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
   3384 precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
   3385 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
   3386 create any program headers other than the ones specified.
   3387 
   3388    The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
   3389 generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
   3390 ignore `PHDRS'.
   3391 
   3392    This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
   3393 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
   3394 
   3395      PHDRS
   3396      {
   3397        NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
   3398              [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
   3399      }
   3400 
   3401    The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
   3402 linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
   3403 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3404 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
   3405 have a distinct name.
   3406 
   3407    Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
   3408 system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
   3409 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
   3410 sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
   3411 to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
   3412 Phdr::.
   3413 
   3414    It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
   3415 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
   3416 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
   3417 section.
   3418 
   3419    If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
   3420 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
   3421 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
   3422 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
   3423 segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
   3424 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
   3425 
   3426    You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
   3427 program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
   3428 The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
   3429 file header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
   3430 the ELF program headers themselves.
   3431 
   3432    The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
   3433 value of the keyword.
   3434 
   3435 `PT_NULL' (0)
   3436      Indicates an unused program header.
   3437 
   3438 `PT_LOAD' (1)
   3439      Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
   3440      loaded from the file.
   3441 
   3442 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
   3443      Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
   3444 
   3445 `PT_INTERP' (3)
   3446      Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
   3447      be found.
   3448 
   3449 `PT_NOTE' (4)
   3450      Indicates a segment holding note information.
   3451 
   3452 `PT_SHLIB' (5)
   3453      A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
   3454      ELF ABI.
   3455 
   3456 `PT_PHDR' (6)
   3457      Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
   3458 
   3459 EXPRESSION
   3460      An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
   3461      may be used for types not defined above.
   3462 
   3463    You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
   3464 address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
   3465 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
   3466 LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
   3467 section attribute.
   3468 
   3469    The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
   3470 which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
   3471 explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
   3472 integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
   3473 
   3474    Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
   3475 headers used on a native ELF system.
   3476 
   3477      PHDRS
   3478      {
   3479        headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
   3480        interp PT_INTERP ;
   3481        text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
   3482        data PT_LOAD ;
   3483        dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
   3484      }
   3485 
   3486      SECTIONS
   3487      {
   3488        . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
   3489        .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
   3490        .text : { *(.text) } :text
   3491        .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
   3492        ...
   3493        . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
   3494        .data : { *(.data) } :data
   3495        .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
   3496        ...
   3497      }
   3498 
   3499 
   3500 File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
   3501 
   3502 3.9 VERSION Command
   3503 ===================
   3504 
   3505 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
   3506 only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
   3507 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
   3508 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
   3509 shared library.
   3510 
   3511    You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
   3512 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
   3513 can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
   3514 
   3515    The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
   3516      VERSION { version-script-commands }
   3517 
   3518    The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
   3519 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
   3520 version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
   3521 version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
   3522 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
   3523 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
   3524 library.
   3525 
   3526    The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
   3527 few examples.
   3528 
   3529      VERS_1.1 {
   3530      	 global:
   3531      		 foo1;
   3532      	 local:
   3533      		 old*;
   3534      		 original*;
   3535      		 new*;
   3536      };
   3537 
   3538      VERS_1.2 {
   3539      		 foo2;
   3540      } VERS_1.1;
   3541 
   3542      VERS_2.0 {
   3543      		 bar1; bar2;
   3544      	 extern "C++" {
   3545      		 ns::*;
   3546      		 "int f(int, double)";
   3547               }
   3548      } VERS_1.2;
   3549 
   3550    This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
   3551 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
   3552 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
   3553 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
   3554 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
   3555 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
   3556 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
   3557 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
   3558 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
   3559 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
   3560 
   3561    Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
   3562 upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
   3563 node `VERS_1.2'.
   3564 
   3565    Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
   3566 depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
   3567 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
   3568 
   3569    When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
   3570 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
   3571 unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
   3572 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
   3573 somewhere in the version script.
   3574 
   3575    The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
   3576 what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
   3577 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
   3578 this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
   3579 
   3580    Node name can be omited, provided it is the only version node in the
   3581 version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
   3582 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
   3583 which won't.
   3584 
   3585      { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
   3586 
   3587    When you link an application against a shared library that has
   3588 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
   3589 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
   3590 each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
   3591 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
   3592 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
   3593 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
   3594 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
   3595 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
   3596 search for each symbol reference.
   3597 
   3598    The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
   3599 doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
   3600 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
   3601 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
   3602 the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
   3603 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
   3604 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
   3605 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
   3606 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
   3607 
   3608    There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
   3609 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
   3610 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
   3611 script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
   3612 maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
   3613      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3614    in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
   3615 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
   3616 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
   3617 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
   3618 version script.
   3619 
   3620    The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
   3621 function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
   3622 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
   3623 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
   3624 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
   3625 
   3626    To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
   3627 file.  Here is an example:
   3628 
   3629      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
   3630      __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3631      __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2");
   3632      __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
   3633 
   3634    In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
   3635 unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
   3636 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
   3637 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
   3638 
   3639    When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
   3640 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
   3641 this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
   3642 type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
   3643 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
   3644 have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
   3645 
   3646    If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
   3647 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
   3648 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
   3649 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
   3650 
   3651    You can also specify the language in the version script:
   3652 
   3653      VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
   3654 
   3655    The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
   3656 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
   3657 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
   3658 `version-script-commands'.
   3659 
   3660    Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
   3661 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
   3662 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
   3663 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
   3664 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
   3665 cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
   3666 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
   3667 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
   3668 when you upgrade.
   3669 
   3670 
   3671 File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
   3672 
   3673 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
   3674 ==================================
   3675 
   3676 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
   3677 that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
   3678 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
   3679 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
   3680 
   3681    You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
   3682 
   3683    The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
   3684 in expressions.
   3685 
   3686 * Menu:
   3687 
   3688 * Constants::			Constants
   3689 * Symbols::			Symbol Names
   3690 * Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
   3691 * Location Counter::		The Location Counter
   3692 * Operators::			Operators
   3693 * Evaluation::			Evaluation
   3694 * Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
   3695 * Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
   3696 
   3697 
   3698 File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3699 
   3700 3.10.1 Constants
   3701 ----------------
   3702 
   3703 All constants are integers.
   3704 
   3705    As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
   3706 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
   3707 The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
   3708 
   3709    In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
   3710 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
   3711 following all refer to the same quantity:
   3712      _fourk_1 = 4K;
   3713      _fourk_2 = 4096;
   3714      _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
   3715 
   3716 
   3717 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
   3718 
   3719 3.10.2 Symbol Names
   3720 -------------------
   3721 
   3722 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
   3723 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
   3724 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
   3725 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
   3726 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
   3727      "SECTION" = 9;
   3728      "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
   3729 
   3730    Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
   3731 safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
   3732 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
   3733 
   3734 
   3735 File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3736 
   3737 3.10.3 Orphan Sections
   3738 ----------------------
   3739 
   3740 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
   3741 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
   3742 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
   3743 to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
   3744 heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
   3745 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
   3746 loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
   3747 then it places at the end of the file.
   3748 
   3749    For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
   3750 as well as section flag.
   3751 
   3752 
   3753 File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
   3754 
   3755 3.10.4 The Location Counter
   3756 ---------------------------
   3757 
   3758 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
   3759 output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
   3760 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
   3761 `SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
   3762 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
   3763 
   3764    Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
   3765 moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
   3766 location counter may never be moved backwards.
   3767 
   3768      SECTIONS
   3769      {
   3770        output :
   3771          {
   3772            file1(.text)
   3773            . = . + 1000;
   3774            file2(.text)
   3775            . += 1000;
   3776            file3(.text)
   3777          } = 0x12345678;
   3778      }
   3779    In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
   3780 at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
   3781 1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
   3782 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
   3783 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
   3784 (*note Output Section Fill::).
   3785 
   3786    Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
   3787 current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
   3788 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
   3789 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
   3790 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
   3791 Thus in a script like this:
   3792 
   3793      SECTIONS
   3794      {
   3795          . = 0x100
   3796          .text: {
   3797            *(.text)
   3798            . = 0x200
   3799          }
   3800          . = 0x500
   3801          .data: {
   3802            *(.data)
   3803            . += 0x600
   3804          }
   3805      }
   3806 
   3807    The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
   3808 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
   3809 `.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
   3810 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
   3811 backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
   3812 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
   3813 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
   3814 section itself.
   3815 
   3816    Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
   3817 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
   3818 needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
   3819 
   3820      SECTIONS
   3821      {
   3822          start_of_text = . ;
   3823          .text: { *(.text) }
   3824          end_of_text = . ;
   3825 
   3826          start_of_data = . ;
   3827          .data: { *(.data) }
   3828          end_of_data = . ;
   3829      }
   3830 
   3831    If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
   3832 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
   3833 `.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
   3834 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
   3835 particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
   3836 associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
   3837 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
   3838 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
   3839 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
   3840 script was written as follows:
   3841 
   3842      SECTIONS
   3843      {
   3844          start_of_text = . ;
   3845          .text: { *(.text) }
   3846          end_of_text = . ;
   3847 
   3848          start_of_data = . ;
   3849          .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
   3850          .data: { *(.data) }
   3851          end_of_data = . ;
   3852      }
   3853 
   3854    This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
   3855 `start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
   3856 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
   3857 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
   3858 section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
   3859 write:
   3860 
   3861      SECTIONS
   3862      {
   3863          start_of_text = . ;
   3864          .text: { *(.text) }
   3865          end_of_text = . ;
   3866 
   3867          . = . ;
   3868          start_of_data = . ;
   3869          .data: { *(.data) }
   3870          end_of_data = . ;
   3871      }
   3872 
   3873    Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
   3874 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
   3875 
   3876 
   3877 File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
   3878 
   3879 3.10.5 Operators
   3880 ----------------
   3881 
   3882 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
   3883 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
   3884      precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
   3885      (highest)
   3886      1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
   3887      2               left            *  /  %
   3888      3               left            +  -
   3889      4               left            >>  <<
   3890      5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
   3891      6               left            &
   3892      7               left            |
   3893      8               left            &&
   3894      9               left            ||
   3895      10              right           ? :
   3896      11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
   3897      (lowest)
   3898    Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
   3899 
   3900 
   3901 File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
   3902 
   3903 3.10.6 Evaluation
   3904 -----------------
   3905 
   3906 The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
   3907 an expression when absolutely necessary.
   3908 
   3909    The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
   3910 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
   3911 regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
   3912 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
   3913 
   3914    However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
   3915 until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
   3916 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
   3917 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
   3918 
   3919    The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
   3920 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
   3921 allocation.
   3922 
   3923    Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
   3924 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
   3925 
   3926    If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
   3927 available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
   3928 following
   3929      SECTIONS
   3930        {
   3931          .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
   3932            { *(.text) }
   3933        }
   3934 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
   3935 address'.
   3936 
   3937 
   3938 File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
   3939 
   3940 3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
   3941 -----------------------------------
   3942 
   3943 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
   3944 or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
   3945 fixed offset from the base of a section.
   3946 
   3947    The position of the expression within the linker script determines
   3948 whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
   3949 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
   3950 section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
   3951 
   3952    A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
   3953 request relocatable output using the `-r' option.  That means that a
   3954 further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
   3955 section will be the section of the relative expression.
   3956 
   3957    A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
   3958 through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
   3959 will not have any particular associated section.
   3960 
   3961    You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
   3962 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
   3963 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
   3964 section `.data':
   3965      SECTIONS
   3966        {
   3967          .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
   3968        }
   3969    If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
   3970 `.data' section.
   3971 
   3972 
   3973 File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
   3974 
   3975 3.10.8 Builtin Functions
   3976 ------------------------
   3977 
   3978 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
   3979 use in linker script expressions.
   3980 
   3981 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
   3982      Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
   3983      value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
   3984      absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
   3985      symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
   3986      Section::.
   3987 
   3988 `ADDR(SECTION)'
   3989      Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
   3990      script must previously have defined the location of that section.
   3991      In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
   3992      identical values:
   3993           SECTIONS { ...
   3994             .output1 :
   3995               {
   3996               start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
   3997               ...
   3998               }
   3999             .output :
   4000               {
   4001               symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
   4002               symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
   4003               }
   4004           ... }
   4005 
   4006 `ALIGN(ALIGN)'
   4007 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
   4008      Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
   4009      to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
   4010      change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
   4011      on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
   4012      be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
   4013      ALIGN)').
   4014 
   4015      Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
   4016      next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
   4017      variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
   4018      input sections:
   4019           SECTIONS { ...
   4020             .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
   4021               *(.data)
   4022               variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
   4023             }
   4024           ... }
   4025      The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
   4026      location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
   4027      attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
   4028      Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
   4029      value of a symbol.
   4030 
   4031      The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
   4032 
   4033 `BLOCK(EXP)'
   4034      This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
   4035      scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
   4036      output section.
   4037 
   4038 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
   4039      This is equivalent to either
   4040           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
   4041      or
   4042           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
   4043      depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
   4044      pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
   4045      expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
   4046      latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
   4047      memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
   4048      bytes in the on-disk file.
   4049 
   4050      This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
   4051      not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
   4052      script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
   4053      should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
   4054      for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
   4055 
   4056      Example:
   4057             . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
   4058 
   4059 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
   4060      This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
   4061      evaluation purposes.
   4062 
   4063             . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
   4064 
   4065 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
   4066      This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
   4067      option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
   4068      option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
   4069      otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
   4070      aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
   4071      target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
   4072      between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
   4073 
   4074             . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
   4075 
   4076 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
   4077      Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
   4078      defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
   4079      return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
   4080      symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
   4081      set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
   4082      section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
   4083      is preserved:
   4084 
   4085           SECTIONS { ...
   4086             .text : {
   4087               begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
   4088               ...
   4089             }
   4090             ...
   4091           }
   4092 
   4093 `LENGTH(MEMORY)'
   4094      Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4095 
   4096 `LOADADDR(SECTION)'
   4097      Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally
   4098      the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
   4099      is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
   4100      LMA::).
   4101 
   4102 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4103      Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4104 
   4105 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4106      Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4107 
   4108 `NEXT(EXP)'
   4109      Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
   4110      This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
   4111      the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
   4112      file, the two functions are equivalent.
   4113 
   4114 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
   4115      Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4116 
   4117 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
   4118      Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
   4119      value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
   4120      option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
   4121      DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
   4122      used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
   4123      sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
   4124 
   4125 `SIZEOF(SECTION)'
   4126      Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
   4127      been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
   4128      evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
   4129      example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
   4130           SECTIONS{ ...
   4131             .output {
   4132               .start = . ;
   4133               ...
   4134               .end = . ;
   4135               }
   4136             symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
   4137             symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
   4138           ... }
   4139 
   4140 `SIZEOF_HEADERS'
   4141 `sizeof_headers'
   4142      Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
   4143      information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
   4144      can use this number when setting the start address of the first
   4145      section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
   4146 
   4147      When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
   4148      `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
   4149      number of program headers before it has determined all the section
   4150      addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
   4151      additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
   4152      room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
   4153      using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
   4154      script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
   4155      headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
   4156      `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
   4157 
   4158 
   4159 File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
   4160 
   4161 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
   4162 ============================
   4163 
   4164 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
   4165 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
   4166 linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
   4167 linker will report an error.
   4168 
   4169    An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
   4170 
   4171    Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
   4172 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
   4173 
   4174    Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
   4175 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
   4176 script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
   4177 
   4178 
   4179 File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
   4180 
   4181 4 Machine Dependent Features
   4182 ****************************
   4183 
   4184 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
   4185 describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
   4186 not listed.
   4187 
   4188 * Menu:
   4189 
   4190 
   4191 * H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
   4192 
   4193 * i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
   4194 
   4195 * ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
   4196 
   4197 * HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
   4198 
   4199 * MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
   4200 
   4201 * MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
   4202 
   4203 * PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4204 
   4205 * PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4206 
   4207 * TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
   4208 
   4209 * WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4210 
   4211 * Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4212 
   4213 
   4214 File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4215 
   4216 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
   4217 =======================
   4218 
   4219 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
   4220 specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4221 
   4222 _relaxing address modes_
   4223      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4224      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4225      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4226 
   4227 _synthesizing instructions_
   4228      `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
   4229      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4230      changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
   4231      linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
   4232      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4233 
   4234 _bit manipulation instructions_
   4235      `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
   4236      biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
   4237      bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
   4238      to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
   4239      address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
   4240      into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
   4241      page of memory).
   4242 
   4243 _system control instructions_
   4244      `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instrcutions which use the 32 bit
   4245      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4246      changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
   4247      turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
   4248      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4249 
   4250 
   4251 File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4252 
   4253 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
   4254 =================================
   4255 
   4256 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
   4257 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
   4258 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
   4259 instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
   4260 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
   4261 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
   4262 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
   4263 
   4264    For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
   4265 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
   4266 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
   4267 
   4268      try
   4269      libtry.a
   4270      tryca
   4271      libtryca.a
   4272 
   4273 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
   4274 two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
   4275 
   4276    You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
   4277 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
   4278 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
   4279 specifies a library.
   4280 
   4281    `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
   4282 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
   4283 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
   4284 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
   4285 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
   4286 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
   4287 not itself call any subroutines).
   4288 
   4289 
   4290 File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4291 
   4292 4.3 `ld' and the ARM family
   4293 ===========================
   4294 
   4295 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
   4296 betweem ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
   4297 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
   4298 option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
   4299 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
   4300 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
   4301 given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
   4302 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
   4303 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
   4304 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
   4305 
   4306    The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
   4307 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
   4308 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
   4309 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
   4310 straight away.
   4311 
   4312    The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
   4313 executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
   4314 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
   4315 
   4316    The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
   4317 `.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
   4318 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
   4319 `--target1-abs' switches override the default.
   4320 
   4321    The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
   4322 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
   4323 and target defaults are as follows:
   4324 `rel'
   4325      `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
   4326 
   4327 `abs'
   4328      `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
   4329 
   4330 `got-rel'
   4331      `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
   4332 
   4333    The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
   4334 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
   4335 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
   4336 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
   4337 objects.
   4338 
   4339    In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
   4340 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
   4341 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
   4342 
   4343    In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
   4344 relocations are ignored.
   4345 
   4346    The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
   4347 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
   4348 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
   4349 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
   4350 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
   4351 
   4352    This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
   4353 to specify it if you are using that target.
   4354 
   4355 
   4356 File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4357 
   4358 4.4 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
   4359 ====================================
   4360 
   4361 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
   4362 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
   4363 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
   4364 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
   4365 sub-spaces.
   4366 
   4367    Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
   4368 sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
   4369 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
   4370 stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
   4371 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
   4372 and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
   4373 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
   4374 sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
   4375 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4376 negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
   4377 `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
   4378 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
   4379 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
   4380 
   4381    Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4382 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
   4383 create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
   4384 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
   4385 
   4386 
   4387 File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4388 
   4389 4.5 `ld' and MMIX
   4390 =================
   4391 
   4392 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
   4393 object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
   4394 format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
   4395 formats.
   4396 
   4397    There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
   4398 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
   4399 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
   4400 symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
   4401 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
   4402 register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
   4403 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
   4404 `Main' for `mmo' files.
   4405 
   4406    Symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
   4407 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special; there must
   4408 be only one each, even if they are local.  The default linker script
   4409 uses these to set the default start address of a section.
   4410 
   4411    Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
   4412 section, are left out from an mmo file.
   4413 
   4414 
   4415 File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4416 
   4417 4.6 `ld' and MSP430
   4418 ===================
   4419 
   4420 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
   4421 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
   4422 MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
   4423 the linker).
   4424 
   4425    The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
   4426 specific:
   4427 
   4428 ``.vectors''
   4429      Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
   4430 
   4431 ``.bootloader''
   4432      Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
   4433      code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4434 
   4435 ``.infomem''
   4436      Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
   4437      this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4438 
   4439 ``.infomemnobits''
   4440      This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
   4441      this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
   4442 
   4443 ``.noinit''
   4444      Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
   4445 
   4446      The last two sections are used by gcc.
   4447 
   4448 
   4449 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4450 
   4451 4.7 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4452 =======================================
   4453 
   4454 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
   4455 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
   4456 fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
   4457 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
   4458 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
   4459 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.
   4460 
   4461 `--bss-plt'
   4462      Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
   4463      code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
   4464      security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
   4465      writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
   4466      `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
   4467      if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
   4468      compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
   4469      (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
   4470 
   4471 `--sdata-got'
   4472      The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
   4473      sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
   4474      location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
   4475      initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
   4476      reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
   4477      allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
   4478      relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
   4479      always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
   4480      accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
   4481      `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
   4482      use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
   4483      useful for other compilers that may do so.
   4484 
   4485 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4486      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4487      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4488 
   4489 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4490      PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
   4491      used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
   4492      the optimization.
   4493 
   4494 
   4495 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4496 
   4497 4.8 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4498 =========================================
   4499 
   4500 `--stub-group-size'
   4501      Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
   4502      placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
   4503      sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
   4504      group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
   4505      offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
   4506      sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
   4507      it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
   4508      it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
   4509      serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
   4510      chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4511      negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
   4512      and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
   4513      section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
   4514      behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
   4515      values of `N' respectively.
   4516 
   4517      Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4518      single input section larger than the group size specified will of
   4519      course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
   4520      are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
   4521      stub.
   4522 
   4523 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4524      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4525      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4526 
   4527 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
   4528      These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
   4529      a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
   4530      function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
   4531      a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
   4532      properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
   4533      to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
   4534      default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
   4535      Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
   4536 
   4537 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4538      PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
   4539      sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
   4540      disable the optimization.
   4541 
   4542 `--no-opd-optimize'
   4543      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
   4544      corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
   4545      by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker scrip `/DISCARD/'.  Use
   4546      this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
   4547 
   4548 `--non-overlapping-opd'
   4549      Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
   4550      `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
   4551      the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
   4552      next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
   4553 
   4554 `--no-toc-optimize'
   4555      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
   4556      Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
   4557      the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
   4558      a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
   4559      a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
   4560      relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
   4561      unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
   4562      reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
   4563      discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
   4564      reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
   4565      assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
   4566      disable the optimization.
   4567 
   4568 `--no-multi-toc'
   4569      By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
   4570      entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
   4571      total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
   4572      grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
   4573      its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
   4574      inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
   4575      cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
   4576      exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
   4577      Use this option to turn off this feature.
   4578 
   4579 
   4580 File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4581 
   4582 4.9 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
   4583 ===============================================
   4584 
   4585 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
   4586 versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
   4587 supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
   4588 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
   4589 depends on the default specified by the specific target.
   4590 
   4591 
   4592 File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4593 
   4594 4.10 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4595 ==================================
   4596 
   4597 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
   4598 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed decription of the
   4599 command line options mentioned here.
   4600 
   4601 _import libraries_
   4602      The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
   4603      libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
   4604      are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
   4605      archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
   4606      for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
   4607      command line option.
   4608 
   4609 _exporting DLL symbols_
   4610      The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
   4611 
   4612     _using auto-export functionality_
   4613           By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
   4614           functionality, which is controlled by the following command
   4615           line options:
   4616 
   4617              * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
   4618 
   4619              * -exclude-symbols
   4620 
   4621              * -exclude-libs
   4622 
   4623           If, however, `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly
   4624           on the command line, then the default auto-export behavior
   4625           will be _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
   4626 
   4627              * A DEF file is used.
   4628 
   4629              * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
   4630                __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
   4631 
   4632     _using a DEF file_
   4633           Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
   4634           file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
   4635           should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
   4636           named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
   4637           to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
   4638           `.def' or `.DEF'.
   4639 
   4640                gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
   4641 
   4642           Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
   4643           unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
   4644 
   4645           Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
   4646           `xyz.dll':
   4647 
   4648                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
   4649 
   4650                EXPORTS
   4651                foo
   4652                bar
   4653                _bar = bar
   4654                another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
   4655                var1 DATA
   4656 
   4657           This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
   4658           and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
   4659           symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
   4660           `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
   4661           and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
   4662           `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
   4663           object.
   4664 
   4665           The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
   4666           name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   4667           the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
   4668 
   4669           When the .DEF file is used to build an application. rather
   4670           than a library, the `NAME <name>' command shoud be used
   4671           instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   4672           the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
   4673 
   4674           With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
   4675           specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
   4676           non-default base address for the image.
   4677 
   4678           If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
   4679           or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
   4680           same as the filename specified on the command line.
   4681 
   4682           The complete specification of an export symbol is:
   4683 
   4684                EXPORTS
   4685                  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
   4686                     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
   4687                  [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
   4688 
   4689           Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
   4690           declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
   4691           declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
   4692           `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
   4693           the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
   4694           `<integer>' alias.
   4695 
   4696           The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
   4697 
   4698           `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
   4699           table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
   4700           (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
   4701           otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
   4702           name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
   4703           any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
   4704 
   4705           `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
   4706           function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
   4707           reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
   4708           be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
   4709 
   4710           `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
   4711           well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
   4712           read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
   4713           to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
   4714           code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
   4715           explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
   4716           attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
   4717 
   4718           `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
   4719           not put it into the static import library used to resolve
   4720           imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
   4721           the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
   4722           using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
   4723           without an import library.
   4724 
   4725           See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
   4726           specification of other DEF file statements
   4727 
   4728           While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
   4729           with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
   4730 
   4731     _Using decorations_
   4732           Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
   4733           source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
   4734           to be exported is declared as:
   4735 
   4736                __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
   4737                __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
   4738 
   4739           All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
   4740           any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
   4741           in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
   4742           disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
   4743           used.
   4744 
   4745           Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
   4746           _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
   4747           dllimport, instead:
   4748 
   4749                __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
   4750                __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
   4751 
   4752           This complicates the structure of library header files,
   4753           because when included by the library itself the header must
   4754           declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
   4755           included by client code the header must declare them as
   4756           dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
   4757           used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
   4758           declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
   4759           `automatic data imports' for more imformation.
   4760 
   4761 _automatic data imports_
   4762      The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
   4763      only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
   4764      let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
   4765      with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
   4766      existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
   4767      libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
   4768      initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
   4769      decorations to archieve a behavior that conforms to that on
   4770      POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
   4771      `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
   4772      by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
   4773      itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
   4774      ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
   4775 
   4776      auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
   4777      additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
   4778 
   4779      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   4780      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   4781 
   4782      The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
   4783      occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
   4784      difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
   4785      feature, described below.
   4786 
   4787      For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
   4788      classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
   4789      variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
   4790      particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
   4791      the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
   4792      fixing these references at runtime without the additional
   4793      information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
   4794      standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
   4795      these references.
   4796 
   4797      The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
   4798      references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
   4799      adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
   4800      to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
   4801      versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
   4802      provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
   4803      support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
   4804      compiled result will run without error on an older system.
   4805 
   4806      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
   4807      explicitly enabled as needed.
   4808 
   4809 _direct linking to a dll_
   4810      The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
   4811      including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
   4812      libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
   4813      does the traditional import library method, expecially when
   4814      linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
   4815      import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
   4816      stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
   4817      exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
   4818      processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
   4819      tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
   4820      particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
   4821 
   4822      Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
   4823      other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
   4824      number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
   4825      the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
   4826      order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
   4827 
   4828      For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
   4829      attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
   4830 
   4831           libxxx.dll.a
   4832           xxx.dll.a
   4833           libxxx.a
   4834           cygxxx.dll (*)
   4835           libxxx.dll
   4836           xxx.dll
   4837 
   4838      before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
   4839 
   4840      (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
   4841      `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
   4842      `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
   4843      standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
   4844      effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
   4845 
   4846      Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
   4847      use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
   4848      of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
   4849      conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
   4850      environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
   4851      could coexist on the same machine.
   4852 
   4853      The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
   4854      applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
   4855      libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
   4856 
   4857           bin/
   4858           	cygxxx.dll
   4859           lib/
   4860           	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
   4861           	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
   4862 
   4863      Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
   4864      done two ways:
   4865 
   4866      1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
   4867           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
   4868 
   4869      However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
   4870      names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
   4871      specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
   4872      libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
   4873 
   4874      2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
   4875      directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
   4876      should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
   4877      making the app/dll.
   4878 
   4879           ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
   4880 
   4881      Then you can link without any make environment changes.
   4882 
   4883           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
   4884 
   4885      This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
   4886      the following is perfectly legal
   4887 
   4888           bin/
   4889           	cygxxx-5.dll
   4890           lib/
   4891           	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
   4892 
   4893      Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
   4894      even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
   4895      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
   4896 
   4897      Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
   4898      justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
   4899      are two reasons:
   4900 
   4901      1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
   4902      work with auto-imported data.
   4903 
   4904      2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
   4905      the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
   4906      indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
   4907      the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
   4908      and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
   4909 
   4910      So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
   4911      true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
   4912      dll, in most cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
   4913      binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
   4914      massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
   4915      requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
   4916      will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
   4917 
   4918 _symbol aliasing_
   4919 
   4920     _adding additional names_
   4921           Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
   4922           names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
   4923           also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
   4924           DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
   4925           optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
   4926           file:
   4927 
   4928                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   4929 
   4930                EXPORTS
   4931                foo
   4932                _foo = foo
   4933 
   4934           The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
   4935 
   4936           Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
   4937           the source code using the "weak" attribute:
   4938 
   4939                void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
   4940                void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
   4941 
   4942           See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
   4943           weak symbols.
   4944 
   4945     _renaming symbols_
   4946           Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
   4947           cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
   4948           exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
   4949           directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
   4950           library, if it is created).  In the following example:
   4951 
   4952                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   4953 
   4954                EXPORTS
   4955                _foo = foo
   4956 
   4957           The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
   4958           `_foo'.
   4959 
   4960      Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
   4961      unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
   4962      If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
   4963      _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
   4964      are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
   4965      option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
   4966      use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
   4967      both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
   4968      symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
   4969      symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
   4970 
   4971 _weak externals_
   4972      The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
   4973      called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
   4974      symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
   4975      other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
   4976         * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
   4977           historically called lazy externals.
   4978 
   4979         * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
   4980           libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
   4981 
   4982         * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
   4983           implemented.
   4984      As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
   4985      symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
   4986      the symbol uses a default value.
   4987 
   4988 
   4989 File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4990 
   4991 4.11 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4992 ===============================
   4993 
   4994 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
   4995 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
   4996 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
   4997 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
   4998 example, with the command:
   4999 
   5000      SECTIONS
   5001      {
   5002        .text : {
   5003          *(.literal .text)
   5004        }
   5005      }
   5006 
   5007 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
   5008 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
   5009 range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
   5010 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
   5011 `.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
   5012 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
   5013 the files would follow.
   5014 
   5015    Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
   5016 provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
   5017 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
   5018 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
   5019 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
   5020 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
   5021 the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
   5022 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
   5023 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
   5024 `CALLN' instructions.
   5025 
   5026    For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
   5027 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
   5028 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
   5029 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
   5030 not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
   5031 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
   5032 alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
   5033 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
   5034 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
   5035 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
   5036 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
   5037 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
   5038 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
   5039 are required for correctness.
   5040 
   5041    The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
   5042 control the linker:
   5043 
   5044 `--no-relax'
   5045      Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
   5046      default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
   5047 
   5048 `--size-opt'
   5049      When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
   5050      size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
   5051      insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
   5052      target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
   5053      required to preserve the correctness of the code.
   5054 
   5055 
   5056 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
   5057 
   5058 5 BFD
   5059 *****
   5060 
   5061 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
   5062 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
   5063 object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
   5064 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
   5065 it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
   5066 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
   5067 object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
   5068 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
   5069 your configuration.
   5070 
   5071    As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
   5072 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
   5073 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
   5074 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
   5075 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
   5076 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
   5077 greater speed.
   5078 
   5079    One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
   5080 is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
   5081 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
   5082 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
   5083 
   5084 * Menu:
   5085 
   5086 * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
   5087 
   5088 
   5089 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
   5090 
   5091 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
   5092 ===================================
   5093 
   5094 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
   5095 the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
   5096 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
   5097 the object file's data structures.
   5098 
   5099    As different information from the object files is required, BFD
   5100 reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
   5101 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
   5102 tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
   5103 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
   5104 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
   5105 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
   5106 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
   5107 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
   5108 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
   5109 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
   5110 convert it into the chosen output format.
   5111 
   5112 * Menu:
   5113 
   5114 * BFD information loss::	Information Loss
   5115 * Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
   5116 
   5117 
   5118 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
   5119 
   5120 5.1.1 Information Loss
   5121 ----------------------
   5122 
   5123 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
   5124 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
   5125 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
   5126 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
   5127 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
   5128 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
   5129 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
   5130 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
   5131 internally, so the link is performed correctly).
   5132 
   5133    Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
   5134 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
   5135 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
   5136 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
   5137 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
   5138 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
   5139 command language.
   5140 
   5141    _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
   5142 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
   5143 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
   5144 internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
   5145 possible data richness through the transformation between external to
   5146 internal and back to external formats.
   5147 
   5148    This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
   5149 format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
   5150 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
   5151 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
   5152 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
   5153 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
   5154 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
   5155 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
   5156 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
   5157 information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
   5158 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
   5159 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
   5160 `b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
   5161 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
   5162 
   5163 
   5164 File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
   5165 
   5166 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
   5167 ------------------------------------------
   5168 
   5169 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
   5170 least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
   5171 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
   5172 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
   5173 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
   5174 conversions.  
   5175 
   5176 _files_
   5177      Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
   5178      architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
   5179      pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
   5180      magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
   5181      so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
   5182      write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
   5183      stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
   5184      files may be used with one another.
   5185 
   5186 _sections_
   5187      Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
   5188      the section's original address in the object file, size and
   5189      alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
   5190      data structures.
   5191 
   5192 _symbols_
   5193      Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
   5194      file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
   5195      flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
   5196      relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
   5197      section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
   5198      symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
   5199      varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
   5200      the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
   5201      for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
   5202      of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
   5203 
   5204      Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
   5205      so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
   5206      pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
   5207      Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
   5208      information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
   5209      This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
   5210      linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
   5211 
   5212      There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
   5213      format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
   5214      example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
   5215      within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
   5216      information will be preserved.
   5217 
   5218 _relocation level_
   5219      Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
   5220      symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
   5221      section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
   5222      descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
   5223      the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
   5224      relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
   5225      method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
   5226      instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
   5227      record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
   5228      routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
   5229      byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
   5230      such relocation type.
   5231 
   5232 _line numbers_
   5233      Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
   5234      mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
   5235      output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
   5236      symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
   5237      number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
   5238      of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
   5239      allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
   5240      is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
   5241      offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
   5242      simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
   5243      formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
   5244 
   5245 
   5246 File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
   5247 
   5248 6 Reporting Bugs
   5249 ****************
   5250 
   5251 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
   5252 
   5253    Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
   5254 or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
   5255 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
   5256 better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
   5257 
   5258    In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   5259 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   5260 
   5261 * Menu:
   5262 
   5263 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   5264 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   5265 
   5266 
   5267 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5268 
   5269 6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
   5270 =========================
   5271 
   5272 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
   5273 guidelines:
   5274 
   5275    * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
   5276      a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
   5277 
   5278    * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   5279 
   5280    * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   5281      may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
   5282      object files are correct.
   5283 
   5284    * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
   5285      improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
   5286 
   5287 
   5288 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5289 
   5290 6.2 How to Report Bugs
   5291 ======================
   5292 
   5293 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
   5294 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
   5295 contact that organization first.
   5296 
   5297    You can find contact information for many support companies and
   5298 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
   5299 
   5300    Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to `bug-binutils (a] gnu.org'.
   5301 
   5302    The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   5303 *report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
   5304 leave it out, state it!
   5305 
   5306    Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
   5307 problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
   5308 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
   5309 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
   5310 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
   5311 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
   5312 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
   5313 doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
   5314 specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   5315 and the most helpful.
   5316 
   5317    Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
   5318 the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
   5319 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
   5320 
   5321    Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
   5322 bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   5323 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
   5324 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   5325 
   5326    To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   5327 
   5328    * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
   5329      `--version' argument.
   5330 
   5331      Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
   5332      looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
   5333 
   5334    * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
   5335      patches made to the `BFD' library.
   5336 
   5337    * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
   5338      and version number.
   5339 
   5340    * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
   5341      "`gcc-2.7'".
   5342 
   5343    * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
   5344      observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
   5345      important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
   5346      from make) is sufficient.
   5347 
   5348      If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
   5349      wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
   5350 
   5351    * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
   5352      the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
   5353      files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
   5354      10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
   5355      or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
   5356      file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
   5357      going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
   5358      large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
   5359 
   5360      If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
   5361      `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
   5362      object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
   5363      `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
   5364      `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
   5365 
   5366    * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   5367      incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
   5368 
   5369      Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
   5370      will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
   5371      might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
   5372      not give us a chance to make a mistake.
   5373 
   5374      Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
   5375      still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
   5376      such as, your copy of `ld' is out of synch, or you have
   5377      encountered a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has
   5378      happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told
   5379      us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know
   5380      that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
   5381      expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion
   5382      from our observations.
   5383 
   5384    * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
   5385      diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
   5386      Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   5387      discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
   5388      by line number.
   5389 
   5390      The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
   5391      in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
   5392      information to us.
   5393 
   5394    Here are some things that are not necessary:
   5395 
   5396    * A description of the envelope of the bug.
   5397 
   5398      Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   5399      which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   5400      changes will not affect it.
   5401 
   5402      This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
   5403      we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
   5404      debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
   5405      examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   5406 
   5407      Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
   5408      of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   5409      output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   5410      less time, and so on.
   5411 
   5412      However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
   5413      this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
   5414      used.
   5415 
   5416    * A patch for the bug.
   5417 
   5418      A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
   5419      omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
   5420      assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
   5421      with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
   5422      might not understand it at all.
   5423 
   5424      Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
   5425      construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
   5426      path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
   5427      not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
   5428      that the bug is fixed.
   5429 
   5430      And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
   5431      your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
   5432      test case will help us to understand.
   5433 
   5434    * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   5435 
   5436      Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
   5437      such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   5438 
   5439 
   5440 File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
   5441 
   5442 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
   5443 **************************************
   5444 
   5445 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
   5446 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
   5447 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
   5448 Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
   5449 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
   5450 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
   5451 described here.
   5452 
   5453    In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
   5454 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
   5455 features to make use of them.
   5456 
   5457    You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
   5458 `-c' command-line option.
   5459 
   5460    Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
   5461 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
   5462 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
   5463 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
   5464 a warning message, but continues processing the script.
   5465 
   5466    Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
   5467 
   5468    You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
   5469 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
   5470 list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
   5471 
   5472 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
   5473 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   5474      Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
   5475      the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
   5476      use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
   5477      present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
   5478      at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
   5479      `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
   5480      still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
   5481      line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
   5482 
   5483 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
   5484      Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
   5485      in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
   5486 
   5487      IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
   5488 
   5489 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
   5490      Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
   5491      should be a power of two.
   5492 
   5493 `BASE EXPRESSION'
   5494      Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
   5495      absolute addresses) in the output file.
   5496 
   5497 `CHIP EXPRESSION'
   5498 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
   5499      This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
   5500 
   5501 `END'
   5502      This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
   5503      compatibility.
   5504 
   5505 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   5506      Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
   5507      language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
   5508 
   5509        1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
   5510 
   5511        2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
   5512 
   5513        3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
   5514           `COFF'
   5515 
   5516 `LIST ANYTHING...'
   5517      Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
   5518      `ld' command-line option `-M'.
   5519 
   5520      The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
   5521      with no change in its effect.
   5522 
   5523 `LOAD FILENAME'
   5524 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
   5525      Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
   5526      same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
   5527      line.
   5528 
   5529 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
   5530      OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
   5531      MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
   5532      option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
   5533 
   5534 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   5535 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
   5536      Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
   5537      in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
   5538      MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
   5539      `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
   5540      first in your output file, in the order specified.
   5541 
   5542 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
   5543 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
   5544 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
   5545      Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
   5546      linker input files.
   5547 
   5548 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
   5549 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
   5550 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
   5551      You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
   5552      specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
   5553      you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
   5554      the _first_ sets the start address.
   5555 
   5556 
   5557 File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
   5558 
   5559 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
   5560 *****************************************
   5561 
   5562                         Version 1.1, March 2000
   5563 
   5564      Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   5565      51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
   5566 
   5567      Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
   5568      of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
   5569 
   5570 
   5571   0. PREAMBLE
   5572 
   5573      The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
   5574      written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
   5575      the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
   5576      modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
   5577      this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
   5578      credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
   5579      modifications made by others.
   5580 
   5581      This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
   5582      works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
   5583      It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
   5584      license designed for free software.
   5585 
   5586      We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
   5587      free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
   5588      free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
   5589      that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
   5590      software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
   5591      of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
   5592      We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
   5593      instruction or reference.
   5594 
   5595 
   5596   1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
   5597 
   5598      This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
   5599      notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
   5600      under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
   5601      any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
   5602      and is addressed as "you."
   5603 
   5604      A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
   5605      Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
   5606      modifications and/or translated into another language.
   5607 
   5608      A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
   5609      section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
   5610      relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
   5611      Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
   5612      nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
   5613      (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
   5614      mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
   5615      The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
   5616      the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
   5617      philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
   5618 
   5619      The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
   5620      titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
   5621      the notice that says that the Document is released under this
   5622      License.
   5623 
   5624      The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
   5625      listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
   5626      that says that the Document is released under this License.
   5627 
   5628      A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
   5629      represented in a format whose specification is available to the
   5630      general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
   5631      and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
   5632      composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
   5633      widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
   5634      text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
   5635      formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
   5636      otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
   5637      to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
   5638      Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
   5639 
   5640      Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
   5641      ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
   5642      SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
   5643      standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
   5644      Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
   5645      can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
   5646      or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
   5647      available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
   5648      processors for output purposes only.
   5649 
   5650      The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
   5651      plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
   5652      material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
   5653      works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
   5654      Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
   5655      work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
   5656 
   5657   2. VERBATIM COPYING
   5658 
   5659      You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
   5660      commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
   5661      copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
   5662      applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
   5663      add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
   5664      may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
   5665      or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
   5666      you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
   5667      distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
   5668      the conditions in section 3.
   5669 
   5670      You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
   5671      and you may publicly display copies.
   5672 
   5673   3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
   5674 
   5675      If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
   5676      100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
   5677      must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
   5678      all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
   5679      Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
   5680      and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
   5681      front cover must present the full title with all words of the
   5682      title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
   5683      on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
   5684      covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
   5685      satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
   5686      other respects.
   5687 
   5688      If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
   5689      legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
   5690      reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
   5691      adjacent pages.
   5692 
   5693      If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
   5694      numbering more than 100, you must either include a
   5695      machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
   5696      state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
   5697      computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
   5698      of the Document, free of added material, which the general
   5699      network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
   5700      charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the
   5701      latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
   5702      begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
   5703      this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
   5704      location until at least one year after the last time you
   5705      distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
   5706      retailers) of that edition to the public.
   5707 
   5708      It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
   5709      the Document well before redistributing any large number of
   5710      copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
   5711      version of the Document.
   5712 
   5713   4. MODIFICATIONS
   5714 
   5715      You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
   5716      under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
   5717      release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
   5718      the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
   5719      licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
   5720      whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
   5721      things in the Modified Version:
   5722 
   5723      A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
   5724      distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous
   5725      versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
   5726      History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title
   5727      as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version
   5728      gives permission.
   5729      B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
   5730      entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
   5731      Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal
   5732      authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it
   5733      has less than five).
   5734      C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
   5735      Modified Version, as the publisher.
   5736      D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
   5737      E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
   5738      adjacent to the other copyright notices.
   5739      F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
   5740      notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
   5741      under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the
   5742      Addendum below.
   5743      G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
   5744      Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
   5745      license notice.
   5746      H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
   5747      I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
   5748      to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
   5749        publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
   5750      If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
   5751      create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
   5752      the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item
   5753      describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous
   5754      sentence.
   5755      J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
   5756        public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
   5757      likewise    the network locations given in the Document for
   5758      previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the
   5759      "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work
   5760      that was published at    least four years before the Document
   5761      itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers
   5762      to gives permission.
   5763      K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
   5764      preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
   5765       substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
   5766      and/or dedications given therein.
   5767      L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
   5768      unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
   5769      or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
   5770      M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section
   5771      may not be included in the Modified Version.
   5772      N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to
   5773      conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
   5774 
   5775      If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
   5776      appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
   5777      material copied from the Document, you may at your option
   5778      designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
   5779      add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
   5780      Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
   5781      other section titles.
   5782 
   5783      You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
   5784      nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
   5785      parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
   5786      been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
   5787      of a standard.
   5788 
   5789      You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
   5790      and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
   5791      of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
   5792      passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
   5793      added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
   5794      Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
   5795      previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
   5796      you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
   5797      replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
   5798      publisher that added the old one.
   5799 
   5800      The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
   5801      License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
   5802      assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
   5803 
   5804   5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
   5805 
   5806      You may combine the Document with other documents released under
   5807      this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
   5808      modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
   5809      all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
   5810      unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
   5811      combined work in its license notice.
   5812 
   5813      The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
   5814      multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
   5815      copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
   5816      but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
   5817      by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
   5818      original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
   5819      unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
   5820      the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
   5821      combined work.
   5822 
   5823      In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
   5824      "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
   5825      entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
   5826      "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
   5827      must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
   5828 
   5829   6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
   5830 
   5831      You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
   5832      documents released under this License, and replace the individual
   5833      copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
   5834      that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
   5835      rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
   5836      documents in all other respects.
   5837 
   5838      You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
   5839      distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
   5840      a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
   5841      this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
   5842      that document.
   5843 
   5844   7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
   5845 
   5846      A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
   5847      separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
   5848      a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
   5849      Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
   5850      copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is
   5851      called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
   5852      other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
   5853      account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
   5854      derivative works of the Document.
   5855 
   5856      If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
   5857      copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
   5858      quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
   5859      placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
   5860      aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
   5861      aggregate.
   5862 
   5863   8. TRANSLATION
   5864 
   5865      Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
   5866      distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
   5867      4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
   5868      permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
   5869      translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
   5870      original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
   5871      translation of this License provided that you also include the
   5872      original English version of this License.  In case of a
   5873      disagreement between the translation and the original English
   5874      version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
   5875 
   5876   9. TERMINATION
   5877 
   5878      You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
   5879      except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
   5880      attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
   5881      void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
   5882      License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
   5883      from you under this License will not have their licenses
   5884      terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
   5885 
   5886  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
   5887 
   5888      The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
   5889      the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
   5890      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
   5891      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
   5892      http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
   5893 
   5894      Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
   5895      number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
   5896      version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
   5897      have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
   5898      that specified version or of any later version that has been
   5899      published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
   5900      the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
   5901      you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
   5902      Free Software Foundation.
   5903 
   5904 
   5905 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
   5906 ====================================================
   5907 
   5908 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
   5909 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
   5910 notices just after the title page:
   5911 
   5912      Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
   5913      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
   5914      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
   5915      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
   5916      with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
   5917      Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
   5918      A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
   5919      Free Documentation License."
   5920 
   5921    If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
   5922 instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
   5923 Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
   5924 LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
   5925 
   5926    If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
   5927 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
   5928 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
   5929 permit their use in free software.
   5930 
   5931 
   5932 File: ld.info,  Node: Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
   5933 
   5934 Index
   5935 *****
   5936 
   5937 [index]
   5938 * Menu:
   5939 
   5940 * ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
   5941 * -(:                                    Options.            (line  609)
   5942 * --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  627)
   5943 * --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  649)
   5944 * --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1343)
   5945 * --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  819)
   5946 * --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  825)
   5947 * --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  104)
   5948 * --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  637)
   5949 * --auxiliary:                           Options.            (line  205)
   5950 * --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1348)
   5951 * --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   23)
   5952 * --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   5953 * --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  701)
   5954 * --cref:                                Options.            (line  711)
   5955 * --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line  853)
   5956 * --default-symver:                      Options.            (line  849)
   5957 * --defsym SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  739)
   5958 * --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  752)
   5959 * --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1495)
   5960 * --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1624)
   5961 * --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1295)
   5962 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1637)
   5963 * --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1358)
   5964 * --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  513)
   5965 * --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  517)
   5966 * --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1353)
   5967 * --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1501)
   5968 * --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   5969 * --dynamic-linker FILE:                 Options.            (line  765)
   5970 * --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1291)
   5971 * --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  415)
   5972 * --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   5973 * --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   37)
   5974 * --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1487)
   5975 * --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1510)
   5976 * --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1642)
   5977 * --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1295)
   5978 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1629)
   5979 * --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1358)
   5980 * --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  158)
   5981 * --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1244)
   5982 * --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  168)
   5983 * --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1400)
   5984 * --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1376)
   5985 * --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  179)
   5986 * --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  771)
   5987 * --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1406)
   5988 * --filter:                              Options.            (line  226)
   5989 * --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   44)
   5990 * --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  424)
   5991 * --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  774)
   5992 * --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  115)
   5993 * --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   5994 * --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  784)
   5995 * --gpsize:                              Options.            (line  259)
   5996 * --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1304)
   5997 * --heap:                                Options.            (line 1412)
   5998 * --help:                                Options.            (line  792)
   5999 * --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1419)
   6000 * --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  447)
   6001 * --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1428)
   6002 * --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1433)
   6003 * --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  315)
   6004 * --library=ARCHIVE:                     Options.            (line  285)
   6005 * --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1442)
   6006 * --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1447)
   6007 * --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1451)
   6008 * --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1456)
   6009 * --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1461)
   6010 * --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1465)
   6011 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  139)
   6012 * --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6013 * --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  384)
   6014 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  627)
   6015 * --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  649)
   6016 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  825)
   6017 * --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  637)
   6018 * --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  701)
   6019 * --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  723)
   6020 * --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  752)
   6021 * --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6022 * --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  784)
   6023 * --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  804)
   6024 * --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6025 * --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  398)
   6026 * --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6027 * --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6028 * --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6029 * --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   41)
   6030 * --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6031 * --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  811)
   6032 * --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line  844)
   6033 * --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line  857)
   6034 * --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line  866)
   6035 * --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line  870)
   6036 * --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6037 * --oformat:                             Options.            (line  882)
   6038 * --omagic:                              Options.            (line  389)
   6039 * --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1478)
   6040 * --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1470)
   6041 * --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  404)
   6042 * --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line  895)
   6043 * --print-map:                           Options.            (line  347)
   6044 * --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1312)
   6045 * --relax:                               Options.            (line  911)
   6046 * --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
   6047 * --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6048 * --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6049 * --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  428)
   6050 * --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  471)
   6051 * --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
   6052 * --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1647)
   6053 * --section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1081)
   6054 * --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1028)
   6055 * --sort-section alignment:              Options.            (line 1038)
   6056 * --sort-section name:                   Options.            (line 1034)
   6057 * --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1042)
   6058 * --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1047)
   6059 * --stack:                               Options.            (line 1653)
   6060 * --stats:                               Options.            (line 1060)
   6061 * --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  458)
   6062 * --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  462)
   6063 * --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6064 * --stub-group-size=N:                   HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6065 * --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1660)
   6066 * --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
   6067 * --sysroot:                             Options.            (line 1064)
   6068 * --target-help:                         Options.            (line  796)
   6069 * --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6070 * --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6071 * --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   32)
   6072 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
   6073 * --trace:                               Options.            (line  467)
   6074 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  522)
   6075 * --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1069)
   6076 * --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  480)
   6077 * --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  498)
   6078 * --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1096)
   6079 * --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   57)
   6080 * --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1125)
   6081 * --version:                             Options.            (line  507)
   6082 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1131)
   6083 * --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1138)
   6084 * --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1206)
   6085 * --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1211)
   6086 * --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1225)
   6087 * --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1229)
   6088 * --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1236)
   6089 * --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1239)
   6090 * --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1248)
   6091 * --wrap:                                Options.            (line 1262)
   6092 * -AARCH:                                Options.            (line  103)
   6093 * -aKEYWORD:                             Options.            (line   96)
   6094 * -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  659)
   6095 * -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  115)
   6096 * -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  662)
   6097 * -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  672)
   6098 * -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1020)
   6099 * -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  679)
   6100 * -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  694)
   6101 * -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  139)
   6102 * -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  662)
   6103 * -d:                                    Options.            (line  149)
   6104 * -dc:                                   Options.            (line  149)
   6105 * -dn:                                   Options.            (line  679)
   6106 * -dp:                                   Options.            (line  149)
   6107 * -dy:                                   Options.            (line  662)
   6108 * -E:                                    Options.            (line  179)
   6109 * -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  158)
   6110 * -EB:                                   Options.            (line  198)
   6111 * -EL:                                   Options.            (line  201)
   6112 * -F:                                    Options.            (line  226)
   6113 * -f:                                    Options.            (line  205)
   6114 * -fini:                                 Options.            (line  250)
   6115 * -G:                                    Options.            (line  259)
   6116 * -g:                                    Options.            (line  256)
   6117 * -hNAME:                                Options.            (line  267)
   6118 * -i:                                    Options.            (line  276)
   6119 * -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  765)
   6120 * -init:                                 Options.            (line  279)
   6121 * -lARCHIVE:                             Options.            (line  285)
   6122 * -LDIR:                                 Options.            (line  315)
   6123 * -M:                                    Options.            (line  347)
   6124 * -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  337)
   6125 * -Map:                                  Options.            (line  800)
   6126 * -N:                                    Options.            (line  389)
   6127 * -n:                                    Options.            (line  384)
   6128 * -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  679)
   6129 * -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line  876)
   6130 * -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  410)
   6131 * -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  404)
   6132 * -pie:                                  Options.            (line  895)
   6133 * -q:                                    Options.            (line  415)
   6134 * -qmagic:                               Options.            (line  905)
   6135 * -Qy:                                   Options.            (line  908)
   6136 * -r:                                    Options.            (line  428)
   6137 * -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  447)
   6138 * -rpath:                                Options.            (line  945)
   6139 * -rpath-link:                           Options.            (line  967)
   6140 * -S:                                    Options.            (line  462)
   6141 * -s:                                    Options.            (line  458)
   6142 * -shared:                               Options.            (line 1020)
   6143 * -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  267)
   6144 * -static:                               Options.            (line  679)
   6145 * -t:                                    Options.            (line  467)
   6146 * -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  471)
   6147 * -Tbss ORG:                             Options.            (line 1090)
   6148 * -Tdata ORG:                            Options.            (line 1090)
   6149 * -Ttext ORG:                            Options.            (line 1090)
   6150 * -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  480)
   6151 * -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  488)
   6152 * -V:                                    Options.            (line  507)
   6153 * -v:                                    Options.            (line  507)
   6154 * -X:                                    Options.            (line  517)
   6155 * -x:                                    Options.            (line  513)
   6156 * -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  531)
   6157 * -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  522)
   6158 * -z defs:                               Options.            (line  811)
   6159 * -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  535)
   6160 * -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  819)
   6161 * .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6162 * /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
   6163                                                              (line   18)
   6164 * :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
   6165                                                              (line    6)
   6166 * =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
   6167                                                              (line    6)
   6168 * >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
   6169                                                              (line    6)
   6170 * [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
   6171                                                              (line   29)
   6172 * ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
   6173 * absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   6174 * absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6175 * ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6176 * ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   6177 * address, section:                      Output Section Address.
   6178                                                              (line    6)
   6179 * ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
   6180 * ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
   6181 * align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6182 * align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6183 * ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6184 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6185 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
   6186                                                              (line    6)
   6187 * allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6188 * architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
   6189                                                              (line   46)
   6190 * architectures:                         Options.            (line  103)
   6191 * archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  285)
   6192 * archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   71)
   6193 * arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
   6194 * arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
   6195 * ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
   6196 * AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   51)
   6197 * ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6198                                                              (line    9)
   6199 * assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
   6200                                                              (line    9)
   6201 * assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
   6202 * AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6203 * AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6204 * automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  170)
   6205 * back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
   6206 * BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
   6207 * BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   23)
   6208 * BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6209 * BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
   6210 * big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  198)
   6211 * binary input format:                   Options.            (line  115)
   6212 * BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   6213 * bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
   6214 * bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6215 * bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   6216 * BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6217                                                              (line    6)
   6218 * C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
   6219                                                              (line   19)
   6220 * CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
   6221 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6222 * combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1138)
   6223 * command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
   6224 * command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
   6225 * common allocation:                     Options.            (line  149)
   6226 * common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
   6227                                                              (line   20)
   6228 * common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
   6229                                                              (line    6)
   6230 * compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  139)
   6231 * constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
   6232 * CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
   6233                                                              (line   19)
   6234 * constructors:                          Options.            (line  488)
   6235 * constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
   6236                                                              (line   19)
   6237 * crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6238 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
   6239                                                              (line    9)
   6240 * creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  137)
   6241 * cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  711)
   6242 * cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
   6243                                                              (line   30)
   6244 * current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6245 * data:                                  Output Section Data.
   6246                                                              (line    6)
   6247 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
   6248                                                              (line   67)
   6249 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line   88)
   6250 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line   94)
   6251 * dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1074)
   6252 * DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1470)
   6253 * default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
   6254 * default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
   6255 * DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  105)
   6256 * deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  513)
   6257 * demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6258 * demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  752)
   6259 * direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  218)
   6260 * discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
   6261                                                              (line    6)
   6262 * discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6263 * DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1376)
   6264 * DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1501)
   6265 * dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6266 * dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   34)
   6267 * dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   64)
   6268 * dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  765)
   6269 * dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  179)
   6270 * ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6271 * emulation:                             Options.            (line  337)
   6272 * emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
   6273 * END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
   6274 * endianness:                            Options.            (line  198)
   6275 * entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6276 * entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  158)
   6277 * entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
   6278 * ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6279 * error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
   6280 * example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6281 * exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
   6282 * expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6283 * expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
   6284 * expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6285 * expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
   6286 * EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6287                                                              (line   13)
   6288 * fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6289 * file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   6290                                                              (line    6)
   6291 * FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   61)
   6292 * filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
   6293                                                              (line    9)
   6294 * fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
   6295                                                              (line    6)
   6296 * FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6297                                                              (line   39)
   6298 * finalization function:                 Options.            (line  250)
   6299 * first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   79)
   6300 * first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6301 * FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   44)
   6302 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
   6303                                                              (line   20)
   6304 * forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
   6305                                                              (line    6)
   6306 * forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
   6307                                                              (line    6)
   6308 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  424)
   6309 * FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
   6310 * functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
   6311 * garbage collection <1>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6312 * garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  784)
   6313 * generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  410)
   6314 * GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
   6315 * GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
   6316 * GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   44)
   6317 * grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   44)
   6318 * groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  609)
   6319 * H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
   6320 * header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  170)
   6321 * heap size:                             Options.            (line 1412)
   6322 * help:                                  Options.            (line  792)
   6323 * holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
   6324 * holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
   6325                                                              (line   39)
   6326 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6327 * HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6328 * i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
   6329 * image base:                            Options.            (line 1419)
   6330 * implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
   6331                                                              (line    6)
   6332 * import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
   6333 * INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
   6334 * including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
   6335 * including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1248)
   6336 * incremental link:                      Options.            (line  276)
   6337 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
   6338                                                              (line   25)
   6339 * initialization function:               Options.            (line  279)
   6340 * initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   21)
   6341 * input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
   6342 * input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
   6343                                                              (line    9)
   6344 * input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   16)
   6345 * input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  467)
   6346 * input format:                          Options.            (line  115)
   6347 * input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   16)
   6348 * input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
   6349                                                              (line    6)
   6350 * input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
   6351                                                              (line    6)
   6352 * input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
   6353                                                              (line    6)
   6354 * input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
   6355 * INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   16)
   6356 * integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
   6357 * integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   12)
   6358 * internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6359 * invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
   6360 * K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6361 * KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6362 * l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6363 * L, deleting symbols beginning:         Options.            (line  517)
   6364 * lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6365 * ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6366 * LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
   6367 * len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6368 * LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6369 * LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  122)
   6370 * library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   71)
   6371 * link map:                              Options.            (line  347)
   6372 * link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line  967)
   6373 * linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6374 * linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
   6375                                                              (line    6)
   6376 * linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6377 * linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
   6378 * linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
   6379 * linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   16)
   6380 * linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
   6381 * linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
   6382 * LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
   6383 * little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  201)
   6384 * LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
   6385 * load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6386 * LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  125)
   6387 * loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
   6388                                                              (line   22)
   6389 * local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  517)
   6390 * location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6391 * LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6392                                                              (line    6)
   6393 * M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6394 * machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6395                                                              (line   46)
   6396 * machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
   6397 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
   6398 * MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  130)
   6399 * MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6400 * memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   32)
   6401 * memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6402 * memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
   6403                                                              (line    6)
   6404 * memory usage:                          Options.            (line  804)
   6405 * MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  133)
   6406 * MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
   6407 * MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
   6408 * NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
   6409 * name, section:                         Output Section Name.
   6410                                                              (line    6)
   6411 * names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
   6412 * naming the output file:                Options.            (line  404)
   6413 * NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  137)
   6414 * NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  384)
   6415 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
   6416                                                              (line   30)
   6417 * NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
   6418                                                              (line   22)
   6419 * not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  175)
   6420 * o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6421 * objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
   6422 * object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
   6423 * object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
   6424 * object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
   6425 * object size:                           Options.            (line  259)
   6426 * OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  389)
   6427 * opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
   6428 * operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
   6429 * options:                               Options.            (line    6)
   6430 * ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
   6431 * org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6432 * ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6433 * ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
   6434 * orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
   6435 * output file after errors:              Options.            (line  870)
   6436 * output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6437 * output file name in linker scripot:    File Commands.      (line   61)
   6438 * output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
   6439                                                              (line    6)
   6440 * output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
   6441                                                              (line    6)
   6442 * output section data:                   Output Section Data.
   6443                                                              (line    6)
   6444 * OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   61)
   6445 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6446                                                              (line   46)
   6447 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6448 * OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
   6449                                                              (line    6)
   6450 * overlays:                              Overlay Description.
   6451                                                              (line    6)
   6452 * partial link:                          Options.            (line  428)
   6453 * PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6454 * position independent executables:      Options.            (line  897)
   6455 * PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6456 * PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
   6457 * PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6458 * PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6459 * PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   37)
   6460 * PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   41)
   6461 * PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6462 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6463 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6464 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6465 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6466 * PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6467 * PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6468 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6469 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6470 * precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
   6471 * prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
   6472                                                              (line   22)
   6473 * program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6474 * program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
   6475                                                              (line    6)
   6476 * program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  175)
   6477 * program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6478 * PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
   6479 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
   6480 * PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
   6481 * QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6482                                                              (line    6)
   6483 * quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
   6484 * read-only text:                        Options.            (line  384)
   6485 * read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  389)
   6486 * regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6487 * relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6488 * relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line  911)
   6489 * relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
   6490 * relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
   6491 * relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6492 * relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   6493 * relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  428)
   6494 * removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
   6495                                                              (line    6)
   6496 * reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   6497 * requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
   6498 * retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  415)
   6499 * retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line  931)
   6500 * ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   21)
   6501 * round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6502 * round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6503 * runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  267)
   6504 * runtime library search path:           Options.            (line  945)
   6505 * runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  196)
   6506 * scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   12)
   6507 * scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
   6508                                                              (line   20)
   6509 * script files:                          Options.            (line  471)
   6510 * scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
   6511 * search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  315)
   6512 * search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   71)
   6513 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   71)
   6514 * SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
   6515 * section address:                       Output Section Address.
   6516                                                              (line    6)
   6517 * section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   6518 * section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1229)
   6519 * section data:                          Output Section Data.
   6520                                                              (line    6)
   6521 * section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
   6522                                                              (line    6)
   6523 * section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6524 * section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  125)
   6525 * section name:                          Output Section Name.
   6526                                                              (line    6)
   6527 * section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
   6528                                                              (line    6)
   6529 * section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  154)
   6530 * section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
   6531                                                              (line    6)
   6532 * section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
   6533                                                              (line    6)
   6534 * SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
   6535 * sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
   6536                                                              (line    6)
   6537 * segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1090)
   6538 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
   6539 * segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6540 * shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1022)
   6541 * SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   6542                                                              (line    6)
   6543 * SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  154)
   6544 * SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  170)
   6545 * small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
   6546                                                              (line   20)
   6547 * SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
   6548                                                              (line   58)
   6549 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
   6550                                                              (line   54)
   6551 * SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
   6552                                                              (line   46)
   6553 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   6554                                                              (line    6)
   6555 * stack size:                            Options.            (line 1653)
   6556 * standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
   6557 * start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6558 * STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   79)
   6559 * strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  458)
   6560 * strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  462)
   6561 * stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line  931)
   6562 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
   6563                                                              (line    6)
   6564 * suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   12)
   6565 * symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  105)
   6566 * symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
   6567 * symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
   6568 * symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  522)
   6569 * symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
   6570 * symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  447)
   6571 * symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  739)
   6572 * symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
   6573 * symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line  931)
   6574 * synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line  911)
   6575 * synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
   6576 * TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
   6577 * TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   27)
   6578 * TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   32)
   6579 * thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
   6580 * TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   6581 * traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1069)
   6582 * unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  137)
   6583 * undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  480)
   6584 * undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
   6585                                                              (line   13)
   6586 * undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1225)
   6587 * uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
   6588                                                              (line    6)
   6589 * unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
   6590                                                              (line   39)
   6591 * usage:                                 Options.            (line  792)
   6592 * USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   57)
   6593 * using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   42)
   6594 * using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
   6595 * Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  141)
   6596 * variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
   6597 * verbose:                               Options.            (line 1125)
   6598 * version:                               Options.            (line  507)
   6599 * version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
   6600 * version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1131)
   6601 * VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
   6602 * versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
   6603 * warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1138)
   6604 * warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1229)
   6605 * warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1225)
   6606 * weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  380)
   6607 * what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
   6608 * wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   6609                                                              (line    6)
   6610 * Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6611 * Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
   6612 
   6613 
   6614 
   6615 Tag Table:
   6616 Node: Top473
   6617 Node: Overview1235
   6618 Node: Invocation2349
   6619 Node: Options2757
   6620 Node: Environment77412
   6621 Node: Scripts79172
   6622 Node: Basic Script Concepts80906
   6623 Node: Script Format83613
   6624 Node: Simple Example84476
   6625 Node: Simple Commands87572
   6626 Node: Entry Point88023
   6627 Node: File Commands88782
   6628 Node: Format Commands92648
   6629 Node: Miscellaneous Commands94614
   6630 Node: Assignments96844
   6631 Node: Simple Assignments97335
   6632 Node: PROVIDE99071
   6633 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN100276
   6634 Node: Source Code Reference100520
   6635 Node: SECTIONS104100
   6636 Node: Output Section Description105991
   6637 Node: Output Section Name107044
   6638 Node: Output Section Address107920
   6639 Node: Input Section109569
   6640 Node: Input Section Basics110370
   6641 Node: Input Section Wildcards112722
   6642 Node: Input Section Common117455
   6643 Node: Input Section Keep118937
   6644 Node: Input Section Example119427
   6645 Node: Output Section Data120395
   6646 Node: Output Section Keywords123172
   6647 Node: Output Section Discarding126741
   6648 Node: Output Section Attributes127697
   6649 Node: Output Section Type128701
   6650 Node: Output Section LMA129855
   6651 Node: Forced Output Alignment132126
   6652 Node: Forced Input Alignment132394
   6653 Node: Output Section Region132779
   6654 Node: Output Section Phdr133209
   6655 Node: Output Section Fill133873
   6656 Node: Overlay Description135015
   6657 Node: MEMORY139263
   6658 Node: PHDRS143463
   6659 Node: VERSION148502
   6660 Node: Expressions156293
   6661 Node: Constants157171
   6662 Node: Symbols157732
   6663 Node: Orphan Sections158470
   6664 Node: Location Counter159233
   6665 Node: Operators163537
   6666 Node: Evaluation164459
   6667 Node: Expression Section165823
   6668 Node: Builtin Functions167312
   6669 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts174804
   6670 Node: Machine Dependent175579
   6671 Node: H8/300176440
   6672 Node: i960178065
   6673 Node: ARM179750
   6674 Node: HPPA ELF32182666
   6675 Node: MMIX184289
   6676 Node: MSP430185506
   6677 Node: PowerPC ELF32186554
   6678 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64188845
   6679 Node: TI COFF193259
   6680 Node: WIN32193791
   6681 Node: Xtensa211865
   6682 Node: BFD214987
   6683 Node: BFD outline216442
   6684 Node: BFD information loss217728
   6685 Node: Canonical format220245
   6686 Node: Reporting Bugs224602
   6687 Node: Bug Criteria225296
   6688 Node: Bug Reporting225995
   6689 Node: MRI233020
   6690 Node: GNU Free Documentation License237663
   6691 Node: Index257377
   6692 
   6693 End Tag Table
   6694